DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

Transcription

DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
RMT-809/811/812
SERVICE MANUAL
Ver 1.0 2000. 05
Level 2
US Model
Canadian Model
Korea Model
DCR-PC5
AEP Model
UK Model
DCR-PC4E/PC5E
Australian Model
Chinese Model
DCR-PC5E
Photo : DCR-PC5 (GRAY)
RMT-811
E Model
Hong Kong Model
Tourist Model
DCR-PC5/PC5E
J MECHANISM
On the VC-245 board
This service manual provides the information that is premised the
circuit board replacement service and not intended repair inside the
VC-245 board.
Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board and electrical parts
list of the VC-245 board are not shown.
The following pages are not shown.
Schematic diagram .......................... Pages 4-17 to 4-54
Printed wiring board ......................... Pages 4-55 to 4-58
Electrical parts list ............................ Pages 6-13 to 6-25
For MECHANISM ADJUSTMENTS, refer to the
“DV MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
J MECHANISM ” (9-929-807-11).
DCR-PC5
: NTSC model
DCR-PC4E/PC5E : PAL model
• Table showing differences is shown on page 3.
SPECIFICATIONS
— Continued on next page —
DIGITAL VIDEO CAMERA RECORDER
• SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
Check that the following accessories are supplied with your
camcorder.
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH
MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS
LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE
COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS
APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS
PUBLISHED BY SONY.
ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT
À LA SÉCURITÉ!
LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES
DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT
CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE
REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY
DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU
DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following
safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.
1.
2.
3.
Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered
connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes
and bridges.
Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are
"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors.
Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly
transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point
them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.
4.
Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs
of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and
recommend their replacement.
5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing
• Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C
during repairing.
• Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the
circuit board (within 3 times).
• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering
or unsoldering.
—2—
Table for differences of function
Model
Destination
DCR-PC4E
AEP, UK
DCR-PC5
US, CND, E,
HK, KR, JE
Color system
Remote commander
PAL
RMT-809
NTSC
RMT-811
Digital zoom
MEMORY STICK slot
40 ×
✕
120 ×
a
✕
DIGITAL I/O
(RS232C)
LINE IN
EVF (pixel)
DCR-PC5E
DCR-PC5E
AEP, UK
PAL
E, AUS, HK,
CN, JE
PAL
RMT-812
40 ×
RMT-811
120 ×
a
a
a
a
a
✕
a
113 K
180 K
✕
180 K
a
180 K
Remark
a: with IC1402 to IC1407 of VC-245 board.
a: with REC button and IC903 of VC-245 board.
Abbreviation
CND: Canadian mode
HK: Hong Kong model
AUS: Austrarian model
CN: Chinese model
JE:
Tourist model
KR: Korea model
—3—
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SERVICE NOTE
1.
2.
POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS ····························· 7
TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT
(FORCE EJECT) ································································ 7
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
4.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ······································· 8
SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY ·········································· 8
SERVICE MODE DISPLAY ············································· 8
Display Method ·································································· 8
Backup No. ········································································· 8
End of Display ···································································· 8
SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE TABLE ··································· 9
1.
GENERAL
Checking supplied accessories ·················································· 1-1
Quick Start Guide ······································································ 1-1
Getting started ··········································································· 1-2
Using this manual ·································································· 1-2
Step 1 Preparing the power supply ········································ 1-2
Charging the battery pack ···················································· 1-2
Installing the battery pack ···················································· 1-3
Connecting to the mains ······················································ 1-4
Step 2 Inserting a cassette ······················································ 1-4
Step 3 Using a touch panel ···················································· 1-4
Recording –Basics ····································································· 1-5
Recording a picture ································································ 1-5
Shooting backlit subjects (BACK LIGHT) ·························· 1-6
Shooting in the dark (NightShot/Super NightShot) ············· 1-7
Self-timer recording ····························································· 1-7
END SEARCH ···································································· 1-7
Playback –Basics ······································································· 1-8
Playing back a tape ································································ 1-8
Viewing the recording on TV ················································ 1-9
Advanced Recording Operations ············································· 1-10
Recording a still image on a tape –Tape Photo recording ··· 1-10
Adjusting the white balance manually ································· 1-11
Using the wide mode ··························································· 1-11
Using the fader function ······················································ 1-11
Using special effects –Picture effect ···································· 1-12
Using special effects –Digital effect ···································· 1-13
Using the PROGRAM AE function ····································· 1-13
Adjusting the exposure manually ········································ 1-14
Using the spot light-metering mode – Flexible Spot Meter ··· 1-14
Focusing manually ······························································· 1-15
Advanced Playback Operations ··············································· 1-15
Playing back a tape with picture effects ······························ 1-15
Playing back a tape with digital effects ······························· 1-16
Enlarging images recorded on tapes – PB ZOOM ·············· 1-16
Quickly locating a scene using the zero set memory function ·· 1-16
Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title
–Title search ········································································· 1-17
Searching a recording by date –Date search ························ 1-17
Searching for a photo –Photo search/Photo scan ················· 1-18
Editing ····················································································· 1-19
Dubbing a tape ····································································· 1-19
Dubbing only desired scenes –Digital program editing ······ 1-19
Audio dubbing ····································································· 1-22
Superimposing a title ··························································· 1-23
Making your own titles ························································ 1-24
Labeling a cassette ······························································· 1-25
Customizing Your Camcorder ················································· 1-25
Changing the menu settings ················································· 1-25
Resetting the date and time ·················································· 1-27
“Memory Stick” Operations (DCR-PC5/PC5E only) ············· 1-27
Using a “Memory Stick” –introduction ······························· 1-27
Recording still images on “Memory Stick”
–Memory photo recording ··················································· 1-29
Superimposing a still picture in the “Memory Stick”
on a moving picture –MEMORY MIX ································ 1-30
Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image ·· 1-32
Copying still images from a mini DV tape –Photo save ······ 1-32
Viewing a still picture –Memory photo playback ················ 1-33
Enlarging still images recorded on “Memory Stick”s
–Memory PB ZOOM ··························································· 1-34
Playing back images continuously – SLIDE SHOW ··········· 1-34
Preventing accidental erasure –Image protection ················ 1-35
Deleting images ··································································· 1-35
Writing a print mark –PRINT MARK ································· 1-36
Additional Information ···························································· 1-36
Using the viewfinder ···························································· 1-36
Usable cassettes ··································································· 1-36
About i.LINK ······································································· 1-37
Troubleshooting ··································································· 1-38
Self-diagnosis display ·························································· 1-39
Warning indicators and messages ········································ 1-39
Using your camcorder abroad ·············································· 1-40
Maintenance information and precautions ··························· 1-40
Quick Reference ······································································ 1-42
Identifying the parts and controls ········································ 1-42
Quick Function Guide ························································· 1-44
2.
DISASSEMBLY
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
2-6.
2-7.
2-8.
2-9.
2-10.
2-14.
2-15.
LCD UNIT, PD-126 BOARD ········································· 2-2
CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1 ·························· 2-3
CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2 ·························· 2-4
BJ-1 BOARD ··································································· 2-4
LENS-EVF BLOCK ASSEMBLY ·································· 2-5
MICROPHONE BLOCK, SPEAKER ···························· 2-5
VC-245 BOARD ····························································· 2-6
MECHANISM DECK ····················································· 2-6
CF-75 BOARD, LENS DEVICE (LSV-651B) ··············· 2-7
HEADPHONE JACK, S TERMINAL,
LITHIUM BATTERY, MEMORY STICK
CONNECTOR (PC5/PC5E MODEL) ···························· 2-8
NS-12 BOARD, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(PS-30350), CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350) ·· 2-9
LCD HINGE ASSEMBLY ············································ 2-11
ATTACHING HARNESSES OF THE LCD HINGE
ASSEMBLY ·································································· 2-12
CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ································· 2-13
FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION ······························ 2-14
3.
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
3-6.
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)(DCR-PC4E) ······ 3-1
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)(DCR-PC5/PC5E) · 3-3
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) ··························· 3-5
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3) ··························· 3-7
POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ································ 3-9
POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ······························ 3-11
4.
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
2-11.
2-12.
2-13.
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2) ······················· 4-1
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2) ······················· 4-3
4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ············································ 4-5
• CF-75 (CCD IMAGER)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ························· 4-7
• NS-12 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-11
• CF-75 (CCD IMAGER)(1/2),
NS-12 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-13
• CF-75 (PITCH, YAW SENSOR)(2/2)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-15
—4—
Shematic diagram and printed wiring board of the
VC-245 board are not shown.
Pages from 4-17 to 4-58 are not shown.
• PO-5 (PANEL OPEN), PR-34 (PANEL REVERSE)
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS ····················· 4-60
• PO-5 (PANEL OPEN), PR-34 (PANEL REVERSE)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-60
• FP-100 (MODE SWITCH). FP-228 (DEW SENSOR),
FP-102 (TAPE TOP/END SENSOR, S/T REEL)
FLEXIBLE BOARDS AND
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-61
• CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-63
• CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-65
• BJ-1 (JACK, BATTERY)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-67
• BJ-1 (JACK, BATTERY)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-69
• PD-126 (LCD DRIVE)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-71
• PD-126 (LCD DRIVE)(1/2)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-73
• PD-126 (LCD DRIVE)(2/2)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-75
4-3. WAVEFORMS ······························································ 4-77
4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION ································· 4-82
5.
1.
1-1.
5-1.
1-1.
ADJUSTMENTS
Before starting adjustment ··············································· 5-1
Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards. ··· 5-2
CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT ··························· 5-4
PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT
(CAMERA SECTION) ··················································· 5-4
1-1-1. List of Service Tools ························································ 5-4
1-1-2. Preparations ····································································· 5-5
1-1-3. Precaution ········································································ 5-7
1.
Setting the Switch ···························································· 5-7
2.
Order of Adjustments ······················································ 5-7
3.
Subjects ··········································································· 5-7
1-2. INITIALIZATION OF B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 PAGE DATA ··· 5-8
1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF C, D, 8 PAGE DATA ·················· 5-8
1.
Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data ···································· 5-8
2.
Modification of C, D, 8 Page Data ·································· 5-8
3.
C Page Table ···································································· 5-8
4.
D Page Table ·································································· 5-10
5.
8 Page Table ··································································· 5-11
1-2-2. INITIALIZATION OF B PAGE DATA
(DCR-PC5/PC5E) ························································· 5-12
1.
Initializing the B Page Data ··········································· 5-12
2.
Modification of B Page Data ········································· 5-12
3.
B Page Table ·································································· 5-12
1-2-3. INITIALIZATION OF E, F, 7 PAGE DATA ················· 5-13
1.
Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data ··································· 5-13
2.
Modification of E, F, 7 Page Data ································· 5-13
3.
F Page Table ·································································· 5-13
4.
E Page Table ·································································· 5-14
5.
7 Page Table ··································································· 5-15
1-3. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ························ 5-16
36MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment (VC-245 board) ·· 5-16
1.
2.
Zoom Key Center Adjustment ······································· 5-16
3.
HALL Adjustment ························································· 5-17
4.
Flange Back Adjustment (Using Minipattern Box) ······· 5-18
5.
Flange Back Adjustment
(Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart and
Subject More Than 500m Away) ··································· 5-19
5-1.
5-2.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
1-4.
Flange Back Adjustment (1) ·········································· 5-19
Flange Back Adjustment (2) ·········································· 5-19
Flange Back Check ························································ 5-20
Optical Axis Adjustment ··············································· 5-21
Picture Frame Setting ···················································· 5-22
Color Reproduction Adjustment ···································· 5-23
MAX GAIN Adjustment ··············································· 5-24
Auto White Balance & LV Standard Data Input ··········· 5-24
Auto White Balance Adjustment ··································· 5-25
White Balance Check ···················································· 5-26
Mechanical Shutter Adjustment (DCR-PC5/PC5E) ······ 5-27
Steady Shot Check ························································· 5-27
COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER SYSTEM
ADJUSTMENT ····························································· 5-28
1.
VCO Adjustment (VC-245 board) ································ 5-28
2.
Bright Adjustment (VC-245 board) ······························· 5-29
3.
Contrast Adjustment (VC-245 board) ··························· 5-29
4.
White Balance Adjustment (VC-245 board) ················· 5-30
1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··································· 5-31
1.
VCO Adjustment (PD-126 board) ································· 5-31
2.
Bright Adjustment (PD-126 board) ······························· 5-32
3.
Black Limit Adjustment (PD-126 board) ······················ 5-32
4.
Contrast Adjustment (PD-126 board) ···························· 5-33
5.
Center Level Adjustment (PD-126 board) ····················· 5-33
6.
V-COM Adjustment (PD-126 board) ···························· 5-34
7.
White Balance Adjustment (PD-126 board) ·················· 5-34
5-2. MECHANISM SECTION ADJUSTMENT ·················· 5-35
2-1. HOW TO ENTER RECORD MODE WITHOUT
CASSETTE ··································································· 5-35
2-2. HOW TO ENTER PLAYBACK MODE WITHOUT
CASSETTE ··································································· 5-35
2-3. TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT ········································ 5-35
1.
Preparation for Adjustment ··········································· 5-35
2.
Procedure after operations ············································· 5-35
5-3. VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENTS ··························· 5-36
3-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS ············ 5-36
3-1-1. Equipment Required ······················································ 5-36
3-1-2. Precautions on Adjusting ··············································· 5-37
3-1-3. Adjusting Connectors ···················································· 5-38
3-1-4. Connecting the Equipment ············································ 5-38
3-1-5. Alignment Tapes ···························································· 5-39
3-1-6. Input/Output Level and Impedance ······························· 5-39
3-2. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ········ 5-40
1.
Initialization of B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 Page Data ··············· 5-40
2.
Serial No. Input ····························································· 5-40
2-1. Company ID Input ························································· 5-40
2-2. Serial No. Input ····························································· 5-40
3.
Touch Panel Adjustment (VC-245 board) ····················· 5-42
4.
Battery End Check (VC-245 board) ······························ 5-42
3-3. SERVO AND RF SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··············· 5-43
1.
Cap FG Duty Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ··················· 5-43
2.
PLL f0 & LPF f0 Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ·············· 5-43
3.
Switching Position Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ·········· 5-44
4.
AGC Center Level and APC & AEQ Adjustment ········· 5-44
4-1. Preparations before adjustments ···································· 5-44
4-2. AGC Center Level Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ·········· 5-44
4-3. APC & AEQ Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ··················· 5-45
4-4. Processing after Completing Adjustments ···················· 5-45
3-4. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ····························· 5-46
3-4-1. Base Band Block Adjustments ······································ 5-46
1.
Chroma BPF f0 Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ················ 5-46
2.
S VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ·· 5-46
3.
S VIDEO OUT Chroma Level Adjustment
(VC-245 Board) ····························································· 5-47
VIDEO OUT Y, Chroma Level Check (VC-245 Board) ·· 5-47
4.
3-4-2. BIST Check ·································································· 5-48
1.
Playback System Check ················································ 5-48
—5—
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
1-5.
1-6.
2.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
3-5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5-4.
4-1.
1.
2.
4-2.
4-3.
1.
2.
2-1.
2-2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Preparations for Playback ·············································· 5-48
IC301 TRX (RF) PB BIST Check ································· 5-48
IC301 AUD (ABUS) PB BIST Check ··························· 5-48
IC301 VFD PB BIST Check ········································· 5-48
IC301 ENCODER BIST Check ···································· 5-50
Processing after Completing Playback System Check ·· 5-51
Recording System Check ·············································· 5-52
Preparations for recording ············································· 5-52
IC301 TRX (RF) REC BIST Check ····························· 5-52
Processing after Completing Recording System Check ·· 5-52
AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ···························· 5-53
Playback Level Check ··················································· 5-54
Overall Level Characteristics Check ····························· 5-54
Overall Distortion Check ··············································· 5-54
Overall Noise Level Check ············································ 5-54
Overall Separation Check ·············································· 5-54
SERVICE MODE ·························································· 5-55
ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER ················ 5-55
Using the adjustment remote commander ····················· 5-55
Precautions upon using the adjustment remote
commander ···································································· 5-55
DATA PROCESS ··························································· 5-56
SERVICE MODE ·························································· 5-57
Setting the Test Mode ···················································· 5-57
Emergence Memory Address ········································ 5-57
EMG Code (Emergency Code) ····································· 5-57
MSW Code ···································································· 5-58
Bit value discrimination ················································ 5-59
Switch check (1) ···························································· 5-59
Switch check (2) ···························································· 5-60
Record of Use check ······················································ 5-60
Record of Self-diagnosis check ····································· 5-61
6.
REPAIR PARTS LIST
6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································ 6-1
6-1-1. OVERALL SECTION ····················································· 6-1
6-1-2. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1 ·························· 6-2
6-1-3. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2 ·························· 6-3
6-1-4. LENS-EVF SECTION ···················································· 6-4
6-1-5. CABINET (L) SECTION ················································ 6-5
6-1-6. CASSETTE COMPARTMENT AND DRUM BLOCK
ASSEMBLY ···································································· 6-6
6-1-7. LS CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY ······························· 6-7
6-1-8. MECHANISM CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY ··········· 6-8
6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ·········································· 6-9
Parts list of the VC-245 board are not shown.
Pages from 6-13 to 6-25 are not shown.
* Optical axis frame and color reproduction frame are
shown on page 198 to 199.
—6—
SERVICE NOTE
1.
POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS
In this unit, about 10 seconds after power is supplied to the battery terminal using the regulated power supply (4.2V), the power is shut off so
that the unit cannot operate.
This following two methods are available to prevent this. Take note of which to use during repairs.
Method 1.
Connect the servicing remote commander RM-95 (J-6082-053-B) to the LANC jack, and set the commander switch to the "ADJ" side.
Method 2.
Use the AC power adaptor (AC-VF10 or AC-VQ11) and connecting cord (DK-115).
2.
1
2
3
4
5
6
TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT (FORCE EJECT)
Refer to 2-2 to remove the accessory shoe.
Refer to 2-2, 2-3 to remove the cabinet (R) assembly.
Refer to 2-5 to remove the lens-EVF block assembly.
Refer to 2-7 to remove VC-245 board.
Refer to 2-8 to remove the mechanism deck.
Supply +4.5V from the DC power supply to the loading motor and unload with a pressing the cassette compartment.
DC power supply
(+4.5Vdc)
: Unloading
: Loading
Loading motor
—7—
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
1.
2.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY
When problems occur while the unit is operating, the counter of the
viewfinder or LCD screen consists of an alphabet and 4-digit
numbers, which blinks at 3.2 Hz. This 5-character display indicates
the “repaired by:”, “block” in which the problem occurred, and
“detailed code” of the problem.
When problems occur while the unit is operating, the self-diagnosis
function starts working, and displays on the viewfinder or LCD
screen what to do. This function consists of two display; selfdiagnosis display and service mode display.
Details of the self-diagnosis functions are provided in the Instruction
manual.
Viewfinder or LCD screen
C:31:11
Blinks at 3.2Hz
C
11
Detailed Code
Block
Repaired by:
C : Corrected by customer
H : Corrected by dealer
E : Corrected by service
engineer
3.
31
Refer to page 9.
Indicates the appropriate
Self-diagnosis Code Table.
step to be taken.
E.g.
31 ....Reload the tape.
32 ....Turn on power again.
SERVICE MODE DISPLAY
The service mode display shows the last self-diagnosis codes shown in the past.
3-1.
Display Method
While pressing the “BACK LIGHT” key, set the switch from OFF to “VCR or PLAYER”, and continue pressing the “BACK LIGHT” key for
5 seconds continuously. The service mode will be displayed, and the counter will show the backup No. and the 5-character self-diagnosis
codes.
Viewfinder or LCD screen
[3] C : 3 1 : 1 1
Lights up
[3]
Backup No.
C:31:11
Self-diagnosis Codes
Order of previous errors
3-2.
Backup No.
The backup No. in the [] indicates the order in which the problem occurred. (If the number of problems which occurred is less than 6, only the
number of problems which occurred will be shown.)
[1] : Occurred first time
[4] : Occurred fourth time
[2] : Occurred second time [5] : Occurred fifth time
[3] : Occurred third time
[6] : Occurred the last time
Note: Switching of the backup No. can’t be done.
3-3.
End of Display
Turning OFF the power supply will end the service mode display.
Note: The “self-diagnosis display” data will be backed up by the coin-type lithium battery of control switch block (FK-30350) BT4001. When this cointype lithium battery is removed, the “self-diagnosis display” data will be lost by initialization.
—8—
4.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE TABLE
Repaired by:
Self-diagnosis Code
Block
Detailed
Function
Code
Symptom/State
Correction
C
C
C
0
2
2
4
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
C
3
1
1
0
C
3
1
1
1
C
3
1
2
0
C
3
1
2
1
C
C
C
C
C
C
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
4
4
2
3
4
0
0
2
C
3
1
1
0
C
3
1
1
1
C
3
2
2
0
C
3
2
2
1
Non-standard battery is used.
Condensation.
Video head is dirty.
LOAD direction. Loading does not
complete within specified time
UNLOAD direction. Loading does not
complete within specified time
T reel side tape slacking when unloading.
Winding S reel fault when counting the
rest of tape.
T reel fault.
S reel fault.
T reel fault.
FG fault when starting capstan.
FG fault when starting drum.
FG fault during normal drum operations.
LOAD direction loading motor timeout.
UNLOAD direction loading motor
time-out.
T reel side tape slacking when
unloading.
Winding S reel fault when counting the
rest of tape.
C
3
2
2
2
T reel fault.
C
3
2
2
3
S reel fault.
C
3
2
2
4
T reel fault.
C
3
2
3
0
FG fault when starting capstan.
C
3
2
4
0
FG fault when starting drum
C
3
2
4
2
FG fault during normal drum
operations
E
6
1
0
0
Difficult to adjust focus
(Cannot initialize focus.)
E
6
1
1
0
Zoom operations fault
(Cannot initialize zoom lens.)
E
6
2
0
0
E
6
2
0
1
Steadyshot function does not work well.
(With pitch angular velocity sensor output
stopped.)
Steadyshot function does not work well.
(With yaw angular velocity sensor output
stopped.)
Use the info LITHIUM battery.
Remove the cassette, and insert it again after one hour.
Clean with the optional cleaning cassette.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
operations from the beginning.
Inspect the lens block focus reset sensor (Pin 7 of CF-75 board)
when focusing is performed when the control dial is rotated in the
focus manual mode, and the focus motor drive circuit (IC204 of
VC-245 board) when the focusing is not performed.
Inspect the lens block zoom reset sensor (Pin w; of CF-75 board)
when zooming is performed when the zoom lens is operated and
the zoom motor drive circuit (IC204 of VC-245 board) when
zooming is not performed.
Inspect pitch angular velocity sensor (SE3450 of CF-75 board)
peripheral circuits.
Inspect yaw angular velocity sensor (SE3451 of CF-75 board)
peripheral circuits.
—9—
SECTION 2
DISASSEMBLY
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.
2-1. LCD unit, PD-126 board
PD-126 board service position
2-2. Cabinet (R) block assembly-1
Service position (Mainly for adjustment)
2-3. Cabinet (R) block assembly-2
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
2-4. BJ-1 board
2-5. Lens-EVF block assembly
2-9. CF-75 board, Lens device (LSV-651B)
2-6. Microphone block, Speaker
2-7. VC-245 board
2-8. Mechanism deck
2-10. Headphone jack , S terminal, Lithium battery,
Memory stick connector (PC5/PC5E model)
2-11. NS-12 board, Control switch block (PS-30350),
Control switch block (FK-30350)
2-12. LCD hinge assembly
2-13. Attaching harnesses of the LCD hinge assembly
2-1
Service position
(Mainly for voltage measurement and check)
NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
2-1. LCD UNIT, PD-126 BOARD
REMOVING THE PD-126 BOARD,
INVERTER TRANSFORMER UNIT
4 Back light
Cold cathode
fluorescent tube
8 Inverter
transformer unit
2 LCD unit
(24P)
1 Touch panel
(TP-30350)(7P)
5 PCB clip
2 LCD cabinet (R)
assembly
1 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
0 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
A
3 Remove the
three solderings
7 Remove the
six solderings
B
9 PD-126 board
6
-12
PD oard
B
6
-12
PD oard
B
qd PD-126 board,
Inverter
transformer unit
4 Two screws
(M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
6 PCB clip
qs Back light
Cold cathode fluorescent tube,
BL shield sheet (N)
qa Two claws
7 Panel spacer
9 LCD unit
8 Touch panel (TP-30350)
5 Panel protection sheet
3 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
A
B
6 LCD cabinet (T)
assembly
[PD-126 BOARD SERVICE POSITION]
Adjustment remote
commander (RM-95)
LANC
jack
Touch panel (TP-30350)
6
-12
PD oard
B
LCD unit
PD-126 board,
Inverter transformer unit
Back light
Cold cathode fluorescent tube,
BL shield sheet (N)
2-2
AC POWER
ADAPTOR
(4.2Vdc)
(AC-VF10)
(AC-VQ11)
AC IN
2-2. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1
1 Two screws
(+K M2 × 5)
2 Accessory shoe
3 MIC cover
4 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), 8 Cabinet (R) block assembly
When removing it, be careful not
lock ace, p2
to damage the harnesses, etc.
5 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
45
-2
VCard
Bo
A
B
7 Push the eject knob in
the direction of the arrow,
and open the cassette lid.
A
B
6 Screw (M1.7 × 4),
lock ace, p2
[SERVICE POSITION (Mainly for adjustment)]
Adjustment remote
commander (RM-95)
AC IN
AC POWER
ADAPTOR
(4.2Vdc)
(AC-VF10)
(AC-VQ11)
CPC-6 terminal board jig
(J-6082-371-A)
CPC-6 flexible jig
(J-6082-370-B)
2-3
2-3. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2
2 Harness
(PR-062) (8P)
4 Cabinet (R) block assembly
1 Harness
(PD-109) (14P)
45
-2
VCard
Bo
A
B
A
B
3 BJ-1 board (60P)
2-4. BJ-1 BOARD
REMOVING THE BJ-1 BOARD
1 Remove the
three solderings
2 Battery holder,
Battery terminal board
3 BJ-1 board
3 BT cushion
9 Battery holder,
Battery terminal board
5 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
6 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
4 Two screws
(M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
1 Open the Jack cover
in the direction of the arrow.
8 BJ-1 board
2 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
7 Harness
(PR-062) (2P)
2-4
2-5. LENS-EVF BLOCK ASSEMBLY
PRECAUTION DURING INSTALLATION
B
A
B
When installing, align the groove A of the
lens-EVF block assembly and the portion
B of the cabinet (L) assembly as shown.
3 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
4 Lens-EVF block assembly
2 NS-12 board (8P)
5
4
-2
VCard
Bo
1 CF-75 board (88P)
2-6. MICROPHONE BLOCK, SPEAKER
3 Microphone block
2 Speaker retainer assembly
1 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
45
-2
VCard
Bo
2
1 Remove the
two solderings
3 Speaker
REMOVING THE SPEAKER
2-5
2-7. VC-245 BOARD
REMOVING THE VC-245 BOARD
VC-245 board
Two claws
2 Remove the VC-245 board
in the direction of the arrow.
8 VC-245
board
4 Flexible board (from capstan motor) (27P)
5 FP-102 flexible board (27P)
6 Flexible board (from video head) (10P)
7 Flexible board (from drum motor) (10P)
3 Control switch block
(FK-30350) (39P)
45
-2
VCard
Bo
45
-2
VCard
Bo
1 Three screws (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
2-8. MECHANISM DECK
3 Open the cabinet (G) assembly,
MD frame assembly in the
direction of the arrow A.
REMOVING THE CASSETTE
COMPARTMENT COVER
1 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
3 Mechanism deck
2 Two screws
(M1.4 × 1.5)
B
A
2 Cassette
compartment cover
1 Two screws
(M1.4 × 1.5)
4 Two dowels
5 Remove the mechanism deck, Cassette compartment
cover in the direction of the arrow B.
(Be careful not to damage the mechanism deck´s flexible.)
2-6
2-9. CF-75 BOARD, LENS DEVICE (LSV-651B)
Note: Be careful that dust must not enter during re-assembly.
REMOVING THE VF LENS ASSEMBLY
3 VF lens assembly
2 Screw (M1.7 × 3),
lock ace, p2
3 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
1
4 VF regulation
ring assembly
2 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
5 VF sleeve
1 Screw (M1.7 × 3),
lock ace, p2
4 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4), p2
2 BL cushion (B), BL unit, BL cushion (L),
Light guide plate block, CF-75 Board
4 LCD
cushion
5 VF sleeve guide assembly
3 LCD (LCX032AK-J) (PC4E) (16P)
LCD (LCX033AK-J) (PC5/PC5E) (16P)
1 Two claws
2 claw
6 BL cushion (L)
5 BL cushion (B)
1 Two claws
7 BL unit
8 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
A
3 Light guide plate block
Remove by sliding in the
direction of the arrow A.
1 Two tapping screws
(M1.7 × 5), p2
4 Light guide
plate block (6P)
9 CF-75 Board
7 Seal rubber
(W)
2 CD frame
6 CF-75 Board
8 Optical filter block
(OFB-04-14)
qd Lens device
(LSV-651B)
5 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
4 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4), p2
qs Zoom motor
0 Forcus motor
3 CF insulating sheet
9 Two tapping screws
(M1.7 × 4), p2
qa Two tapping screws
(M1.7 × 4), p2
2-7
2-10.HEADPHONE JACK, S TERMINAL, LITHIUM BATTERY,
MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR (PC5/PC5E MODEL)
3 Special head
screw (M2.6),
(step)
6 Cabinet (G) assembly
2 Screw
(M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
1 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4), p2
2 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
4 Two dowels
5
1 Close the cabinet (G) assembly and
MD frame assembly in the direction
4 Belt bracket (front)
of the arrow.
assembly, Grip belt
3 Two screws
(M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
qg Cabinet (G) assembly
6 HP jack retainer
7 Remove the
two solderings
1
8 Lithium battery
0 Headphone jack
9 Remove the four solderings
qa Remove the eight solderings
4 Two tapping screws
(M1.7 × 4), p2
qs S terminal
5 Control switch block
(FK-30350)
qd Remove the
eleven solderings
qf Memory stick connector
(PC5/PC5E model)
2-8
2 Two tapping screws
(M1.7 × 4), p2
3 MS connector retainer
2-11. NS-12 BOARD, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PS-30350),
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350)
9 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4), p2
3 Screw
(M1.7 × 2),
lock ace, p2
2 Dowel
1 Screw
(M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
0 Control switch
block (PS-30350)
PRECAUTION DURING
INSTALLATION
Position the claw of the
MD frame assembly on
its top as shown.
8 MD frame assembly
4 Dowel
7 NS-12 board (8P)
6 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
5 NS window assembly
5 G Frame ground plate
3 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
2 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
1 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
6 Cabinet (L) assembly
4 Control switch block
(FK-30350)
2-9
[SERVICE POSITION (Mainly for voltage measurement and check)]
CPC-6 terminal board jig
(J-6082-371-A)
Lens device (LSV-651B)
CPC-6 flexible jig
(J-6082-370-B)
NS-12 board (8P)
Cabinet (R)
block assembly
CF-75 board (88P)
Harness
(PD-109) (14P)
Harness
(PR-062) (8P) (2P)
Control switch block
(FK-30350) (39P)
Adjustment remote
commander (RM-95)
Control switch block
(PS-30350)
45
-2 rd
VC oa
B
Mechanism deck
BJ-1 board (60P)
AC POWER
ADAPTOR
(4.2Vdc)
(AC-VF10)
(AC-VQ11)
VC-245 board
AC IN
Flexible board
(from capstan motor) (27P)
FP-102 flexible board (27P)
Flexible board
(from video head) (10P)
Flexible board
(from drum motor) (10P)
Control switch block
(FK-30350) (39P)
VC
-2
Bo 45
ard
2-10
2-12.LCD HINGE ASSEMBLY
4 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
When fastening 4, fasten it while pushing
the 5 in the direction of the arrow A.
1 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
When fastening 1, fasten it while pushing
5 Blind plate assembly,
the qs in the direction of the arrow B.
PO-5 board
8 Hinge cover (rear)
Hinge cover (front)
6 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
qs LCD hinge
assembly
A
3 MF spacer
2
B
Two claws
Hinge cover (rear)
7 Remove the hinge cover (rear)
in the direction of the arrow.
9 Claw
qa Sheet (S)
0 Hinge
cover (front)
Harness
(PR-062) (8P) (2P)
Harness
(PD-109) (14P)
PRECAUTION DURING
INSTALLATION
6
-12
PD oard
B
Align sheet (S)
with top edge of
LCD cabinet (T)
assembly
Wrap the harness with
sheet (S) for protection.
REMOVING THE HARNESS
(PD-109) (14P)
1 Remove the harness
(PD-109)(14P) in the direction
of the arrow.
REMOVING
THE PO-5 BOARD
Two claws
REMOVING THE HARNESS
(PR-062) (8P) (2P)
2 Route the harness (PR-062) (8P) (2P)
through the hole of the LCD hinge
assembly
5 Remove PO-5 board
in the direction of the arrow.
Then bend the harness so that it is
laid along with the connector.
6 Blind plate assembly
Then bend the harness so that it is laid
along with the connector.
REMOVING
THE PR-35 BOARD
3 Remove the
two solderings
Harness
(Two cores)
(PR-062) (8P) (2P)
(8P)
7 Remove PR-35 board in the
direction of the arrow.
(14P)
4 Remove the
two solderings
(2P)
(8P)
Harness
(PD-109) (14P)
(14P)
2-11
8 LCD hinge assembly
2-13.ATTACHING HARNESSES OF THE LCD HINGE ASSEMBLY
1
2
Blind plate assembly
PR-35 board
Harness
(PR-062) (8P) (2P)
LCD hinge assembly
PO-5 board
Hinge cover (rear)
Harness
(PD-109) (14P)
(8P)
(14P)
Hinge cover (front)
Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
Harness
(PD-109) (14P)
Harness
(PR-062) (8P) (2P)
Bend one of the two
harnesses at its connector.
3
4
A
B
PO-5 board
C
D
5
A KEY-A03
6
B Gnd
7
C KEY-A02
8
D Gnd
Solder at the
two positions.
D
C
B
CN006
A
Harness
(PR-062) (8P) (2P)
5 Install the PO-5 board in
6
LCD hinge assembly
the direction of the arrow.
PR-35 board
Solder at the
two positions.
Route the harnesses (PR-062) (8P) (2P)
and (PD-109) (14P) through the hole of the
LCD hinge assembly as shown.
Two claws
LCD hinge assembly
Blind plate assembly
5 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
4 Hinge
cover (rear)
Attach the PR-35 board to the
LCD hinge assembly with the
both-sided adhesive tape.
7
LCD hinge assembly
8
Hinge cover (rear)
3 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
1 Close Blind plate in the
direction of the arrow.
Harness (PR-062) (8P) (2P),
Harness (PD-109) (14P)
Blind plate
assembly
2 Two claws
Claw
1 Hinge cover (front)
Hinge cover (front)
LCD hinge
assembly
2 When attaching the blind plate assembly, route the
harnesses through the notch as shown while taking
care so that the harness must not be caught or pinched.
3 Close hinge cover (rear)
in the direction of the arrow.
2-12
2-14.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION
The circuit boards contained in the zoom lens are not shown.
CF-75
(CCD IMAGER)
PD-126
(LCD DRIVER)
PO-5
(PANEL OPEN)
PR-34
(PANEL REVERSE)
INVERTER
TRANSFORMER UNIT
NS-12
(REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER)
VC-245
A/D CONVERTER, LENS DRIVER,
CAMERA SIGNAL PROCESSING,
DV SIGNAL PROCESSING,
DV INTERFACE, REC/PB AMP,
PS CONTROL, JPEG, MS INTERFACE,
LINE IN/OUT, EVF/RGB,
DRUM CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE,
MECHA CONTROL, HI CONTROL,
AUDIO IN/OUT, DC/DC CONVERTER
BJ-1
(JACK, BATTERY)
2-13
2-15.FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION
The flexible boards contained in the mechanism deck and that in the zoom lens are not shown.
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(FK-30350) (PC5/PC5E)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(PS-30350)
TOUCH PANEL (TP-30350)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(FK-30350) (PC4E)
2-14E
J3102
LANC/
DIGITAL I/O
YAW SENSOR
SE3451
16
8
12
LANC GND/232C TD
LANC SIG/232C RD
YAW/PITCH
SENSOR
AMP
IC3451
(4-15)
MANUAL
FOCUS
SENSOR
NIGHT SHOT
ZOOM
RESET
SENSOR
M
M
FOCUS
RESET
SENSOR
H
M
BJ-1 BOARD(1/3)
PITCH SENSOR
SE3450
ZOOM
MOTOR
FOCUS
MOTOR
IRIS
METER
IRIS
(SHUTTER)
LENS ASSY
32 32
15
11 11
12 12
28 28
27 27
31 31
17
56 56
CN003
60 60
7
5
17 19
57 57
5
CN3103
4
2
21 23
47 47
5
7
17
19
V1-V4,VSHT
H1,H2,RG
V DRAIN
CN001
6
8
50 50
46 46
40 40
42 42
35 35
36 36
53 53
18
2
ZM A,B
ZM XA,XB
FC A,B
FC XA,XB
HALL +,-
DRIVE +,-
20
1
4
14
11
9
25
23
27
26
CN3351 CN3354
1-4 • 10-13
CCD
IMAGER
IC3201
(4-13)
CF-75 BOARD(1/2)
IRIS DRIVE
MF A,B
9
16
13
12
15
13
47
42
30
HD
VD
14
22
59
58
41
40
23
(4-21)
IC802
(4-21)
ZM RST
FC RST
3-1
ZOOM AD
AD SO,AD SCK
CAM SO,SI,SCK
I HALL AD
IRIS PWM
LANC SIG
PANEL R,G,B,EVF R,G,B,HD,VD
OSD CS,SO,SCK
ZOOM AD
HI SO,SI,SCK
50
|
48
62
54
53
35
34
33
66
43
ENI,DIR 1A,DIR 1B
CAMERA CONTROL
(SEE PAGE
3-8)
2
3
4
ENO,DIR OA,DIR OB
SHUTTER ON
EEPROM
IC801
I HALL AD
138
137
144
143
142
141
140
139
133
50
(4-28)
1
OSD CS
OSD SO
OSD SCK
3
CHARACTER
GENERATOR
IC302
18
•
17
•
16
•
14
COL0 195
•
|
COL3 194
•
191
•
190
184
•
183
48
52
20
•
19
DV SIGNAL
PROCESS
(CAIN)
IC301
51
141
59
55
63
65
67
105
•
106
71
73
75
161
159
179
170
79
81
88
83
97
99
127
132
133
156
153
8
3
7
145
142
23
17
215
(4-37)
72
5
1
213
201
211
205
152
SPCK
C0-C3
199
203
207
21
HD,VD,OE HD,VD OE
C0-C3
Y0-Y7
71
70
56
|
59
61
Y0-Y7
SPCK(IC751)
111
110
46
115
112
(BIRDS+)
CAMERA
PROCESS,
FOCUS/ZOOM
CONTROL,
EVR
|
68
38
HD,VD
CL
MSUB
CLP OB
(4-23)
IC751
196
AD CLK
48
|
131
121
AFCK(IC903)
16
AD SO
AD SCK
AD0-AD9
37
IRIS PWM
23
|
2
11
35
45
44
12
16
15
2
1
19
(GCAM3)
S/H,AGC
A/D CONV.
IC701
4
(4-17)
TIMING
GENERATOR
IC702
30
CLPDM,PBLK
XSHP,XSHD
CCD OUT
5
33
25
22
21
18
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(3/3)
PITCH AD
YAW AD
X801
20MHz
(4-20)
IC204
ZOOM MOTOR
DRIVE
FOCUS MOTOR
DRIVE
SHUTTER
DRIVE
IC201
(4-19)
(4-19)
IRIS HALL AMP
CN001
X701
36MHz
78 78
72 72
69 69
81 81
85 85
IC202
IC203
CN3354
139
138
EVF B
EVF R
EVF G
HD,VD
PANEL B
PANEL R
PANEL G
6
C
Y
SFD BCK
DATA FROM SFD
DATA TO SFD
FRRV,TRRV,TRRT
LCK
TRCK
L BUS
X301
24.576MHz
79
47
42
45
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
(4-17)
VC-245 BOARD(1/3)
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)(DCR-PC4E)
SECTION 3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
(4-27)
SFD BCK
DATA TO SFD
DATA FROM SFD
34
36
7
46
10 • 11
37
29
9
6
9
8
12
14
22
D/A CONV.
A/D CONV.
(ADC&DAC)
IC1002
(4-48)
VSP SO,SCK
LINE OUT
AGC
ACC
(TAKO)
18
(4-25)
MC BUS
TPA+,TPB+,-
IC1301
DV INTERFACE
(LIP)
IC361
V
C
Y
15
2
3
16
L
R
R
L
15
23
25
17
19
14
AUDIO
I/O
(XYZ)
32
42
6
35
2
1
13
14
31
35
19 19
15 15
20 20
24 24
MIC R
EXT MIC R
3
6
23 23
4
3-2
SP+,-
R
L
R
L
CN002
CN003
39
10
8
2
64
55
54
(SEE PAGE
3-5)
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(2/3)
6
3
MIC L
EXT MIC L
IC1001
(4-47)
VSP SO,SI,SCK
FRRV,TRRV,TRRT
MC BUS
ATF ERR
PB CK
6
AD DT
REC DT
REC CK
CN003
R
V
L
L
R
J3102
DV IN/OUT
R
L
(SEE PAGE 4-65)
6
4
2
1
Y
G
(4-65)
CN4003
G
C
CONTROL
SWITCH
BLOCK
(FK-30350)
(1/2)
C
Y
BJ-1 BOARD
(2/3)
CN3103
CN3103
J3103
MIC
R
MIC
L
SPEAKER
HEADPHONE
J4002
S VIDEO
J4001
AUDIO/VIDEO OUT
MIC
J3101
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
LANC/
DIGITAL I/O
J3102
YAW SENSOR
SE3451
16
8
12
LANC GND/232C TD
LANC SIG/232C RD
YAW/PITCH
SENSOR
AMP
IC3451
(4-15)
MANUAL
FOCUS
SENSOR
NIGHT SHOT
ZOOM
RESET
SENSOR
M
M
FOCUS
RESET
SENSOR
H
M
BJ-1 BOARD(1/3)
PITCH SENSOR
SE3450
ZOOM
MOTOR
FOCUS
MOTOR
IRIS
METER
IRIS
(SHUTTER)
LENS-EVF BLOCK
CN3103
32 32
15
11 11
12 12
28 28
27 27
31 31
17
56 56
CN003
60 60
5
5
17 19
57 57
7
21 23
47 47
4
2
5
7
17
19
V1-V4,VSHT
H1,H2,RG
V DRAIN
CN001
6
8
50 50
46 46
53 53
18
2
ZM A,B
ZM XA,XB
FC A,B
FC XA,XB
40 40
20
1
4
14
11
9
25
42 42
HALL +,-
23
36 36
35 35
DRIVE +,-
27
26
CN3351 CN3354
1-4 • 10-13
CCD
IMAGER
IC3201
(4-13)
CF-75 BOARD(1/2)
MF A,B
9
16
13
12
15
13
TIMING
GENERATOR
IC702
59
58
41
40
23
22
14
IC802
(4-21)
ZM RST
FC RST
3-3
ZOOM AD
AD SO,AD SCK
|
2
48
47
11
232C ON
AD CLK
Q1111
PANEL R,G,B,EVF R,G,B,HD,VD
LANC SIG
16
CAM SO,SI,SCK
I HALL AD
IRIS PWM
I HALL AD
IRIS PWM
23
(GCAM3)
S/H,AGC
A/D CONV.
IC701
19
OSD CS,SO,SCK
ZOOM AD
HI SO,SI,SCK
50
|
48
62
54
53
35
34
33
66
43
ENI,DIR 1A,DIR 1B
CAMERA CONTROL
(SEE PAGE
3-8)
2
3
4
ENO,DIR OA,DIR OB
SHUTTER ON
EEPROM
IC801
(4-21)
37
38
35
45
44
12
16
15
2
1
5
(4-17)
30
CLPDM,PBLK
XSHP,XSHD
CCD OUT
4
33
25
22
21
18
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(3/3)
PITCH AD
YAW AD
X801
20MHz
(4-20)
IC204
ZOOM MOTOR
DRIVE
FOCUS MOTOR
DRIVE
SHUTTER
DRIVE
IC201
(4-19)
(4-19)
IRIS HALL AMP
IRIS DRIVE
CN001
X701
36MHz
78 78
72 72
69 69
81 81
85 85
IC202
IC203
CN3354
(4-17)
VC-245 BOARD(1/3)
3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)(DCR-PC5/PC5E)
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
17
16
AD SO
AD SCK
|
131
74
RS232C
I/F
IC1403
18
A0-A11
138
137
144
143
142
141
140
139
133
50
52
111
110
46
115
112
121
(4-31)
HD,VD
CL
MSUB
CLP OB
AD0-AD9
(4-23)
15
13
1
13 •
103
TXD
RXD
(4-24)
16Mbit
SDRAM
IC752
31
85
(BIRDS+)
CAMERA
PROCESS,
FOCUS/ZOOM
CONTROL,
EVR
IC751
38
94
48
D1-D10
42
SPCK
96
(SHIORI)
DIGITAL
STILL
PROCESS
10
HI SO,SI SCK
80
72
60
112
113
115
15
43
44
45
46
|
49
51
8
20
•
19
208
19
1
AFCK
(IC1903)
(4-28)
18
•
17
•
16
•
14
37
32
49
D0-D15
A1-A19
39
2
16Mbit
SDRAM
1
16
25
8
29
4Mbit
FLASH
(4-33)
(4-35)
IC1407
63-66
(4-33)
36
A/D CONV.
IC903
VSP SO,SCK
DV SIGNAL
PROCESS
(CAIN)
IC301
(4-37)
IC1405
12
EXCEPT
AEP/UK MODEL
38
47
|
49
52
|
59
34
31
•
68
COL0 195
•
|
COL3 194
•
191
•
190
HD,VD,OE
C0-C7
Y0-Y7
AFCK
SPCK
(IC751)
OSD CS
OSD SO
OSD SCK
3
CHARACTER
GENERATOR
IC302
184
•
183
48
24
SPCK(IC751)
HD
VD
18
22
8
4
216
212
196
6
2
214
206
202
AFCK(IC903)
HD,VD,OE
C0-C3
200
204
7
3
215
17
21
5
1
213
201
211
205
23
|
58
Y0-Y7
199
207
203
26
HD,VD OE
C0-C3
Y0-Y7
27
28
29
|
32
34
14
2
|
9
17
41
|
12
30
(4-34)
IC1406
|
24
13
C0-C7
Y0-Y7
72
HD,VD,OE
C0-C3
Y0-Y7
71
70
56
|
59
61
|
68
45
6
2
59
55
63
65
67
105
•
106
71
73
75
161
159
179
170
79
81
88
83
97
99
127
132
133
156
153
152
141
51
145
142
139
138
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
RXD
TXD
35
175
181
34
36
161
160
SFD BCK
192
37
29
9
6
12
8
9
14
42
48
39
22
MS DIO,MS SCLK,MS BS
KASYA ON
D/A CONV.
A/D CONV.
(ADC&DAC)
IC1002
(4-48)
VSP SO,SCK
LINE OUT
LINE IN
AGC
ACC
(TAKO)
18
(4-25)
MC BUS
TPA+,TPB+,-
IC1301
10 • 11
X1401
25.8048MHz
DATA FROM SFD
C
Y
7
46
DATA TO SFD
193
|
(LIP)
DV INTERFACE
194
53
(4-27)
IC361
|
(KATHMANDU)
DIGITAL
STILL
CONTROL
IC1404
(4-32)
171 • 172 • 178
C
Y
79
47
42
45
79
57
EVF B
EVF R
EVF G
HD,VD
PANEL B
PANEL R
PANEL G
6
SFD BCK
DATA FROM SFD
DATA TO SFD
FRRV,TRRV,TRRT
LCK
TRCK
L BUS
X301
24.576MHz
V
C
Y
L
R
R
L
3-4
2
3
16
15
4
23
25
17
19
14
15
AUDIO
I/O
(XYZ)
54
L
L
R
23
21
20
6
32
42
35
2
1
13
14
31
35
19 19
15 15
20 20
24 24
MIC R
EXT MIC R
3
6
23 23
4
SP+,-
R
L
R
CN002
CN003
39
10
8
2
64
53
51
55
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(2/3)
(SEE PAGE
3-5)
6
3
MIC L
EXT MIC L
IC1001
(4-47)
VSP SO,SI,SCK
FRRV,TRRV,TRRT
MC BUS
ATF ERR
PB CK
6
AD DT
REC DT
REC CK
CN003
R
V
L
L
R
J3102
L
R
(SEE PAGE 4-65)
G
CN4001
6
4
2
1
Y
(4-65)
CN4003
G
C
CONTROL
SWITCH
BLOCK
(FK-30350)
(1/2)
C
Y
3
7
9
DV IN/OUT
BJ-1 BOARD
(2/3)
CN3103
CN3103
J3103
MIC
R
MIC
L
SPEAKER
HEADPHONE
J4002
S VIDEO
J4001
EXCEPT: AEP,UK
AEP,UK
MEMORY
STICK
AUDIO/VIDEO OUT
AUDIO/VIDEO IN/OUT
MIC
J3101
16
(SEE PAGE
3-8)
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(3/3)
(SEE PAGE
3-2,3-4)
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(1/3)
(4-44)
FRRV
TRRT
TRRV
95
(4-43)
60
SWP
DRP SO,XDRP SCK
18
15
34
(4-29)
SWP
42
XCC DOWN
2-4
EEPROM
IC502
CHIME SDA,CHIME SCK,CHIME VDD
HI SO,SI,SCK
VSP SO,SI,SCK
FRRV TRRT,TRRV
MC BUS
ATF ERR
X501
20MHz
46
45
81
|
41
39
44
55
96
53
54
113
114
50
49
117
116
63
82
47
68
69
22
48
3-5
MECHA
CONTROL
115
80
83
2
1
76
|
74
108
|
106
37
|
26
IC501
|
78
CAP FG
CAP ON,CAP FWD
56
53
(4-41)
58
(RABI)
DRUM
MOTOR
DRIVE
IC401
MODE SW A - MODE SW C
REC PROOF SW
TAPE LED ON
DEW DET
TAPE TOP DETECT
36
35
37
28,30
61
64
20,21,24
TAPE TOP
(1/2)
45,46
TAPE END DETECT
REEL FG AMP
LOADING MOTOR
DRIVE
DRUM PG AMP
DRUM FG AMP
(4-41)
(4-42)
21,23,19
14,15
34
26,25
59
1
16,6,3
11
DRUM VS
18.22
(SALVIA)
CAPSTAN
MOTOR
DRIVE
IC402
CAPSTAN
FG AMP
2
3
6
5
TAPE END
SWITCHING
Q1609
SWITCHING
CAP VS
Q1638-1641
2,3
32
EVEN
42,43
UNREG 2
(2/2)
61
Q1614
31
CN101
ODD
48
PWM
DRIVE
IC1601
(4-49)
22 24
1
2
7
6
40
22
DRUM ERROR
CAP ERROR
(TRF)
EQ
A/D CONV.
PLL
REC/PB
AMP
(TRW)
IC102
SREEL FG
52
54
13
20
IC101
27
42
40
(4-30)
TREEL FG
LOAD,UNLOAD
DRUM PG
DRUM FG
LPF
LPF
(RABI)
(2/2)
IC401
DRUM ON,DRUM FWD,DRUM START
DRUM PWM
CAP PWM
FFREW UP
PB CK
6
6
PB CK
AD DT
AD DT
PB Y OUT
REC DT
RF MON
20
REC CK
17
REC DT
SWP
CN004
FOR ADJUSTMENTS
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
REC CK
VC-245 BOARD(2/3)
3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3)
XCC DOWN
CN008
CN010
CN009
M902
19
|
21
17
12
|
10
13
16
1
M903
LOADING
MOTOR
3-6
S902
SWITCH
MODE
C IN
4PIN
CONNECTOR
REC PROOF
D901
TAPE LED
(4-42)
S903
CN901
S901
Q901
TAPE TOP SENSOR
TAPE END SENSOR
Q902
S REEL
SENSOR
4
5
T REEL
SENSOR
DEW
SENSOR
M
DRUM PG
7
3
DRUM
MOTOR
CAPSTAN
MOTOR
DRUM FG
M
M901
M
FG
CAPSTAN
8
23
24
|
27
10
9
|
6
1
|
14
11
|
4
1
17
|
20
25
DRUM
J MECHA DECK
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
BATTERY
TERMINAL
S
16
BJ-1
BOARD
(3/3)
6
33
5
KEY AD1R
RV4001
CAM DD ON
AU 2.8V
D 1.5V
3-7
A 4.6V
RP 4.6V
LCD 2.8V
LCD 4.6V
LCD 13.5V
PANEL 15.5V
MT 4.8V
CAM 12V
D 2.8V
(4-39)
LANC IN
XPHOTO STBY SW
XS/S SW
XEJECT SW
5
16
17
XVTR MODE SW
43
IR ON
45
46
44
OSD SO
XOSD SCK
XCS OSD
4
59
SIRCS SIG
36
SIRCS ENV
28
29
49
48
2
1
35
34
SIRCS CARRIER
CAM DD ON
VTR DD ON
IB SI
3
1
IB SO
LANC OUT
53
XCAM STBY SW
VDD
XHI SCK
HI SI
33
HI SO
52
41
40
87
77
51
42
XRESET
18
73
XCC DOWN
6
71
CHIME SCL
CHIME AD2
5
CHIME AD0
CHIME SDA
95
KEY AD2
(4-45)
BATT SIG
LANC I/O
IC1103
HI SO,SI,SCK
LED
DRIVE
Q1102,1105,
1115-1119
I/F
Q1104
12
10
11
CN005
CN001
3
3
CN2100
HD OUT
46
47
48
2
RGB
DRIVE
IC2101
(4-73)
PD-126 BOARD
TOUCH
PANEL
PWM
24
22
20
LANC SIG
(SEE PAGE
3-5)
VD
HD
KEY AD1R
HI SO,SCK
EVF R,G,B
48
1
42
45
46
39
40
46
47
48
NS LED K
SIRCS SIG
LANC SIG
ZOOM AD
HI,SO,SI,SCK
12
13
10
(4-39)
2
LCD 4.6V
8
14
24
(SEE PAGE
3-1,3-3)
EVF VG
CN001
EVF VCO
8
5
1
4
2
3
2
13
10
22
63
63
68 68
CN3353
2
LCD
DRIVE
Q2203-2205
Q2202,2207
S2201
(EVF ON/OFF)
3-8
CN3354
PANEL 4.6V
48
1
42
45
46
6
1
6
4
9
BL ON
VCC1
VCC2
BACK
LIGHT
Q2181,2182
LED1
LED2
5
2
TIMING
GENERATOR
IC2103
1
COM
D005,006
(NIGHT SHOT)
REMOTE
COMMANDER
RECEIVER
IC001
(4-14)
24
12
PSIG
COM
VR,VG,VB
HSY
PSIG
COM
VG
CN2104
CN2202
P UNREG
(4-73)
R,G,B
NS-12 BOARD
CN2201
CF-75 BOARD
LED ON/OFF
LED DA
CN3354
CN004
FOR
ADJUSTMENTS
21 21
5
4
19 19
17 17
21 21
22
14 14
5
1
12
35
4
2
24
22
20
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM(1/3)
TIMING
GENERATOR
IC1803
(4-39)
RGB
DRIVE
IC1802
VD
HD
1
8
2
1
PANEL R,G,B
2
3
27
6
2
39
HI SO,SCK
S3601
PANEL
REVERSE
CN2101
CN2103
XCC DOWN
(4-53)
5
1
12
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM(2/3)
S3501
PANEL
OPEN
PR-34 BOARD
(4-53)
PO-5 BOARD
TP R,TP L,TP BOT,TP TOP
40
7
5
4
1
CHIME SDA
CHIME SCK
CHIME VDD
I/F
OSD,CS,SO,SCK
X1102
32.768KHz
X1101
20MHz
6
38
KEY AD1
KEY AD0
97
96
100
KEY AD4
KEY AD7
KEY AD3
A 2.8V
HI UNREG
(4-45)
VDD SWITCH
IC1102
5
HI CONTROL
XPHOTO FREEZE
PANEL R,G,B
EVF R,G,B
HD,VD
30
7
3
RESET
94
93
19
Q002-004
CN006
D 1.9V
D 3.1V
CAM -6.5V
DC/DC
CONVERTER
IC1601
IC1602
IC1603
VTR DD ON
UNREG
BATT SIG
38
34
59 59
CN003
(SEE PAGE 4-65)
ZOOM VR
29
57 57
55 55
53 53
51 51
49 49
47 47
45 45
43 43
41 41
39 39
37 37
35
33
31 31
29 29
27 27
35
CN3103
PS3104
PS3103
PS3102
PS3101
START/STOP SW
EJECT SW
7
26
2
2
CN4004
BATT LI 3V
CN002
28
3
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK(FK-30350)
(2/2)
17
16
33
37
36
IC1104
(4-46)
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
VC-245 BOARD(3/3)
POWER SW 4
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK(PS-30350)
BT4001
LITHIUM
BATTERY
RESET
S4006
DISPLAY SW
BACK LIGHT SW
S4010,4011
FOCUS SW
PHOTO REC SW
SURER NIGHT SHOT SW
S4003,4005,4007,4008
PHOTO FREEZE SW
S004
3-4. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3)
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
3
12
16
13
15
14
22
2
7
8
12
13
19
6
23
3
5
4
5
4
2
1
LCD
UNIT
BACK
LIGHT
DRIVE
INVERTER
BLOCK
LCD
UNIT
CN2105
FOR
ADJUSTMENTS
ND901
BACK
LIGHT
7
14
7
6
5
S
BATTERY
TERMINAL
CN2101
UNREG
CN2100
LCD
UNIT
BACK
LIGHT
PANEL 4.6V
PANEL 13.5V
PANEL 2.8V
(4-73)
PD-126
BOARD
LANC/
DIGITAL I/O
J3102
4
LCD
UNIT
27
1
CF-75
BOARD(1/3)
CN2202
21 21
16 16
L1804
(4-39)
RGB
DRIVE
IC1802
LED ON/OFF
EVF VCC
3-9
8
(4-39)
TIMING
GENERATOR
IC1803
LCD 2.8V
LCD 13.5V
BATT SIG
LCD 4.6V
CN001
CN005
PANEL 15.5V
LCD 4.6V
LCD 13.5V
3
2
8
7
6
5
19 19
CN3354
7
6
5
14
LCD 2.8V
Q1601
SWITCHING
1
4
T1601
17 17
Q2202,
2207
BACK
LIGHT
DRIVE
INVERTER
BLOCK
27
57 59 57 59
53 55 53 55
CN3103
CN2104
47 45 47
49 51 49 51
45
41 43 41 43
37 39 37 39
33 35 33 35
6
LED
DRIVE
18
10
29 31 29 31
10
CN003
VC-245 BOARD(1/2)
D1605
RECT
D1608
RECT
D1607
RECT
D1606
RECT
VTR DD ON
VREF
EMERGENCY
DETECT
Q1602,
1603
2
CTL1-6,8
CTL7
30
CT
RT
VB
VREF
OUT8
-IN8
+IN8
VDD(0)567
VDD(0)123
VSS(0)567
VSS(0)1234
VCC
VCC(0)5678
VCC(0)1234
29
35
34
33
27
3
7
8
60
49
57
46
28
55
D1609
UNREG4
UNREG3
UNREG2
UNREG
LANC DC
DC/DC CONVERTER
IC1601
+IN5
59
OUT5-2
22
58
OUT5-1
18
62
OUT6-2
+IN6
61
44
48
47
11
37
56
40
54
53
43
51
50
OUT6-1
-IN1
OUT1-2
OUT1-1
COMP
-IN4
OUT4
-IN3
OUT3-2
OUT3-1
-IN2
OUT2-2
OUT2-1
1
13
-IN7
64
OUT7-2
OUT7-1
(4-49)
1
4
Q1609
SWITCHING
Q1608
SWITCHING
Q1613
SWITCHING
Q1607
SWITCHING
Q1612
SWITCHING
Q1610
SWITCHING
Q1611
SWITCHING
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
1
CN2201
14
1
Q2203-2206
BLON
TIMING
GENERATOR
Q2181,2182
(4-73)
16
POFF
Q2102,
2104
IC2103
L2103
RGB
DRIVE
IC2101
CN3104
PS3104
PS3103
PS3102
PS3101
(4-69,70)
BJ-1 BOARD
3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)
T1602
CAP VS
D1612(2/2)
RECT
DRUM VS
DRUM ERROR
Q1615
SWITCHING
L1609
CAP ERROR
Q1614
SWITCHING
L1608
Q1619
SWITCHING
L1613
3
2
8
6
5
L1620
L1615
D1612(1/2)
RECT
Q1618
SWITCHING
L1612
Q1616
SWITCHING
L1610
Q1617
SWITCHING
L1611
Q1621
EMERGENCY
DETECT
Q1638-1641
CAP VS
L1618
L1605
L1619
L1621
L1622
L1623
L1624
L1625
22
3
)
(4-51)
PC5/PC5E
-6.5V REG
Q1630-1632
12V REG
Q1622,1624,
1625,1628
13.5V REG
IC1603
2.8V REG
FFREW UP (IC501
5
2
Q1633-1636
Q1606
SWITCHING
L1602
Q1623
SWITCHING
L1627
Q1626,1627,
1629,1637
L1601
3.1V REG
Q1604,1605
L1626
5
(4-51)
D1611
RECT
5
D1613
RECT
(4-51)
CAM DD ON
LCD 2.8V
D 3.1V
RP 4.6V
LCD 4.6V
A 4.6V
CAM -6.5V
CAM 12V
PANEL 15.5V
LCD 13.5V
AU 2.8V
A 2.8V
D 2.8V
D 1.9V
D 1.5V
1
A 2.8V
DRUM ERROR
DRUM VS
CAP ERROR
CAP VS
CAM -6.5V
CAM 12V
RP 4.6V
A 4.6V
D 3.1V
D 1.5V
D 2.8V
AU 2.8V
D 1.9V
LCD 13.5VV
LCD 4.6V
HI UNREG
1
MT 4.8V
HI UNREG
MT 4.8V
UNREG
CAM DD ON
VTR DD ON
2
2
3-10
EMERGENCY
DETECT
Q1620
DC/DC CONV.
(STEP UP)
IC1602
DC/DC CONV.
(STEP UP)
IC1605
L1628
UNREG
LANC DC
BATT SIG
(SEE PAGE
3-11)
TO
POWER
BLOCK
DIAGRAM
(2/2)
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
16
(SEE PAGE
3-10)
TO
POWER BLOCK
DIAGRAM
(1/2)
FB201
Q1012,
1013
(4-47)
2
3
D1104
3
3
REG
(4-47)
(4-45)
CAM -6.5V
CAM 12V
DRUM ERROR
DRUM VS
CAP ERROR
CAP VS
RP 4.6V
A 4.6V
D 3.1V
D 1.5V
D 3.1V
D 1.5V
AU 2.8V
D 2.8V
MT 4.8V
L201
A 2.8V
D 2.8V
D 1.9V
MT 4.8V
RP 4.6V
D 3.1V
A 4.6V
4.6V
IC204
3-11
(4-33)
16Mbit
SDRAM
(4-31)
RS232C
I/F
FOCUS/ZOOM
MOTOR DRIVE
L203
21
(4-20)
(4-21)
CAMERA
CONTROL
IC1405
15
16
VIDEO
LINE IN/OUT
AMP
IC802
L801
AUDIO
ADC&DAC
MF LED
4Mbit
FLASH
(4-33)
IC1407
2
1.5V
(4-17)
(SHIORI)
DIGITAL
STILL
PROCESS
(4-34)
IC1406
(4-30)
REC/PB
AMP
(TRW)
IC102
1.5V REG
IC703
FB753
INTERFACE
DV
RESET
BATTER IN
DETECT
BTT LI 3V
Q1106
IC361
(4-27)
4.6V REG
(4-19)
IRIS DRIVE
IRIS HALL AMP
IC202
IC203
(4-21)
EEPROM
IC801
5
IC1003
7
PC5/PC5E
EXCEPT AEP/UK MODEL
DV
SIGNAL
PROCESS
IC301
(4-45)
(4-25)
(4-48)
VCC
IC1301
HI UNREG
LCD 4.6V
4
8
POWER
IC1403
(4-19)
SHUTTER
DRIVE
IC201
A 4.6V
ZM RST LED
FC RST LED
A/D CONV.
LANC DC
IC1002
UNREG
1
LANC I/O
IC1103
REG
14
D 2.8V
(4-35)(4-37)
(XYZ)
AUDIO I/O
IC1001
IC903
D 2.8V
AU 2.8V
D 2.8V
A 2.8V
A 2.8V
D 1.9V
LCD 13.5V
LCD 4.6V
HI UNREG
MT 4.8V
UNREG
IC1101
5
PLL
EQ,
(4-29)
FB101
L102
(4-23)
A/D CONV.
(TRF)
IC101
(BIRDS+)
CAMERA
SIGNAL
PROCESS
(4-44)
92
12
61
XRESET
(4-32)
33
Q1406,1407
MS VCC ON
IC1404
(4-24)
(GCAM3)
S/H,AGC
A/D CONV.
(4-43)
(4-17)
D 1.9V
A 2.8V
RP 4.6V
Q801
PC5/PC5E
I/F
Q1104
FFREW UP
XREEL
HALL ON
7
IC701
22
105
CHIME PWR CONT
20
14
28
29
XPHOTO STBY SW
MECHA
CONTROL
FB501
49
48
15
XVTR MODE SW
CAM DD ON
VTR DD ON
IB SI
IB SO
(4-46)
XCAM+STBY SW
IC501
IC752
PC4E
VTR DD SENS
XLANC ON
BATT IN
DIGITAL
STILL
CONTROL
16M
SDRAM
PC5/PC5E
IC751
CHARACTER
GENERATER
(4-28)
IC302
EVER 3.0V
38
31 42 51
VDD
63 87
EEPROM
IC502
8
4
6
ACV SENS
IC1102
91
(4-45)
VTR DD ON
CAM DD ON
BATT SENS
90
HI CONTROL
IC1104
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
BATT SIG
LANC DC
VC-245 BOARD(2/2)
3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)
BATT SIG
CN001
CN002
BT4001
LITHIUM BATTERY
RESET
S4006
7
2
3
4
ZOOM VR
MT 4.8V
HI UNREG
18
8
2
MEMORY
STICK
PC5/PC5E
POWER LED
PITCH,YAW
SENSOR
(4-15)
ZM RST LED
D 2.8V
FC RST LED
CAM -6.5V
CAM 12V
DRUM VS
CAP ERROR
DRUM ERROR
5
3-12E
MF VCC
SE3450,3451
CN3353
1
S1
D005,006
REMOTE
COMMANDER
RECEIVER
IC001
(4-14)
NIGHT SHOT
LED
Q203
Q204
TIMING
GENERATOR
CN001
(4-17)
IC702
11
54
52
55 55
45 45
30 30
84 84
82 82
DRUM
MOTOR DRIVE
DRUM FG,PG AMP
LOADING
MOTOR DRIVE
REEL FG AMP
TAPE TOP,END DET
DRUM,CAP ERROR AMP
(4-41)
IC401
Q1109
Q402
CHIME VDD
CN3354
ZM RESET VCC
FC RESET VCC
MF VCC
(4-13)
CCD
IMAGER
IC3201
CN3351
CN008
TAPE LED A
SENSOR VCC
CF-75 BOARD
(3/3)
R424
(4-65)
CONTROL
SWITCH
BLOCK
(PS-30350)
PC5/PC5E
POWER
NS-12 BOARD
MEMORY
CAMERA
OFF
VCR
(4-65,66)
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK(FK-30350)
CAPSTAN MOTOR
DRIVE,
CAP FG AMP
(4-42)
IC402
PITCH,YAW
SENSOR AMP
IC3451
A 2.8V
LCD 4.6V
MT 4.8V
LCD 13.5V
D 2.8V
D4002
RV4001
ACCESS LED
CN4001
CF-75 BOARD(2/3)
CN4004
D 2.8V
D 2.8V
MS VCC
CN3354
CAP_VS
26 26
19 19
17 17
66 66
64 64
17
16
31
26
27
28
35
18
24
CHIME PWR CONT
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
XREEL HALL ON
20
9
15
9
10
ZOOM
RESET
SENSOR
FOCUS
RESET
SENSOR
18 FOCUS
RING
LENS ASSY
(SEE PAGE 4-42)
J MECHA DECK
TAPE LED
T REEL,
S REEL
SENSOR
4PIN
CONNECTOR
N
K
E
J
I
G
F
L
D
C
2 3
O
M
H
B
A
16
PC5/PC5E ONLY
MEMORY
STICK
CONNECTOR
EJECT
(POWER)
START/STOP
FHOTO
CAMERA
OFF
VTR
POWER
SP901
SPEAKER
(MIC L)
(MIC R)
MIC901
5
4
BS
VSS
CASE-GND
10
11
6
DI0
NC
6
VCC
INS
5
9
NC
8
SLCK
4
7
7
VSS
VCC
3
S
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(FK-30350)
2
11P
8P
6P
1
XPHOTO_STBY_SW
CN4001
XCAM+STBY_SW
GND
XVTR_MODE_SW
2
1
3
EJECT_SW
5
4
XS/S_SW
6
CN4004
POWER_LED_VCC
XPOWER_LED
7
SP+
1
8
SP-
2
MIC_L
GND
GND
MIC_R
4
3
5
6
CN4003
C
Y
G
W
S
ZOOM
T
J4002
J4001
S VIDEO
RESET
DISPLAY
AF/MF
BACK LIGHT
INFINITY
PHOTO REC
PHOTO FREEZE
+SLOW SHUTTER
LITHIUM BATTERY
(HEADPHONE)
G
RV4001
S4006
D4002
(MS ACCESS)
S4011
S4010
S4008
S4007
S4005
S4004
S4003
4-1
1
2
3
8
9
10
11
12
13
SP+
SP-
GND
MIC_L
GND
MIC_R
GND
GND
S_Y_I/O
S_C_I/O
XS_JACK_IN
HP_JACK_IN
HP_R
HP_L
GND
BATT_LI_3V
XRESET_SW
14
15
D_2.8V
MS_LED
BS
DIO
INS
SCLK
VCC
GND
XPHOTO_STBY_SW
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
XCAM+STBY_SW
XVTR_MODE_SW
EJECT_SW
POWER_LED_VCC
XS/S_SW
27
28
XPOWER_LED
29
KEY_AD1
ZOOM_SW_AD
D_2.8V
NS-12
BOARD
39P
PHOTO_FREEZE
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
CN002
KEY_AD1R
KEY_AD0
GND
38
37
39
LENS-EVF
BLOCK
GND
1
2
3
4
GND
GND
VIDEO
HEAD
SIRCS_SIG
LCD_4.6V
XF_TALLY_LED
TALLY_LED_A
2
4
6
NS_LED_K
88P
HST
MT_4.8V
CN3354
G
COM
HCK1
HCK2
RGT
5
5
O(+)
6
7
GND
8
12
STB
10
DWN
VST
VCK
8P
9
E(-)
EN
7
88P
B
R
BLK
11
E(+)
8
NC
CN001
NC
1
GND
3
O(-)
13
GND
16
EVF_VCC
GND
15
CN3353
1
10
GND
18
GND
LCD_4.6V
17
14
CN3351
27P
ZM_XA
CN010
10P
ZM_XB
23
FG/PG COM
8
21
FG
9
19
PG
LCD_4.6V
GND
XEVF_SW
GND
FG
PG
M
M901
DRUM
MOTOR
29
V
MF_VCC
GND
MF_A
31
V
33
W
MF_B
GND
DRIVE-
35
W
GND
37
FP-228
FLEXIBLE
FLEXIBLE
S902
MODE
SWITCH
17/19 DD-1 BLOCK
19/19 CN BLOCK
18/19 DD-2 BLOCK
16/19 AU BLOCK
15/19 HI BLOCK
14/19 MC BLOCK
13/19 MD BLOCK
12/19 VF BLOCK
11/19 IO BLOCK
FP-100
M
M903
LOADING
MOTOR
10/19 IN BLOCK
9/19 MS-2 BLOCK
7/19 RF BLOCK
8/19 MS-1 BLOCK
5/19 JC-1 BLOCK
4/19 CA BLOCK
3/19 CM BLOCK
6/19 JC-2 BLOCK
2/19 LD BLOCK
27P
L
1/19 CH BLOCK
27
L
VC-245 BOARD
1
26
BIAS+
41
BIAS-
39
TAPE TOP
Q902
S903
(CC DOWN)
DEW
SENSOR
TAPE END
Q901
63
CIN SW
17
XCCDOWN_SW 11
FC_RESET
FC_A
FC_XA
MT_GND
38
40
42
44
46
48
FC_RESET_VCC
GND
FC_XA
FC_XB
FC_A
FC_B
MF_B
GND
ZM_XA
MT_4.8V
SIRCS_SIG
MT_GND
VSHT
H_GND
H_GND
V4
V3
RG
V2
H1
V1
H2
H_GND
H_GND
MSUB
12V
-6.5V
CCD_GND
CCD_GND
CCD_OUT
CCD_GND
CCD_GND
1
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
66
26
68
27
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
88
6P
CN2201
27P
VCC1
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
VCC2
VVDD
VSS
EN
VST
VCK2
VCK1
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
8
10
CLR
11
RGT
12
HST
13
14
HCK2
B
RF_MON
GND
M
M902
CAPSTAM
MOTOR
20P
RF_IN/LANC_JACK_IN
SWP
GND
JIG_TDO
JIG_TDI
TCK
TMS
NC
NC
GND
NC
EVF_VCO
NC
EVF_VG
NC
CN004
LANC_SIG
NC
NC
HALL
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
LCD902
U
4-2
MR GND
27
MR GND
26
FG2
25
MR Vcc
24
17
J-100 MECHANISM
FG
CPC
(FOR CHECK)
HV(+)
R
HW(+)
BLK
HE GND
HCK1
7
UHE+
W
8
BACK-LIGHT
8
VHE+
W
9
15
9
WHE+
W
10
16
10
HE_GND
W
11
G
11
CAP_W
HW(-)
12
COM
12
CAP_W
HV(-)
13
U
16
13
CAP_W
14
U
15
14
CAP_W
15
U
14
CN009
15
WHE-
16
20
56
58
60
62
64
HALL-
T/E Sensor GND
16
VHE-
17
17
50
52
MT_GND
NS_VCC
ZM_A
ZM_XB
MT4.8V
NS_LED_K
XF_TALLY_LED
DRIVE+
5
23
TOP Sensor
2
17
CAP_U
18
16P
FLEXIBLE
65
LED K
16
12
TAPE_LED_K
Reel Sensor S(+)
4
24
SREEL-
V
1
18
CAP_U
19
CN2202
FP-102
TAPE LED
S901
D901
67
LED A
15
13
TAPE_LED_A
DRIVE-
CN901 3P
REC PROOF
69
MIC/REC.P GND
14
14
MIC/REC_SW_GND
END Sensor
3
25
TAPE_END
V
19
CAP_U
5
26
28
30
34
GND
HALLHALL+
GND
FC_RESET_VCC
32
36
DRIVE+
GND
GND
43
45
FC_B
47
CF-75 BOARD
LM_LOAD
LM_LOAD
1
2
UL
MF_A
FC_XB
49
71
REC.P SW
13
15
XREC_PROOF
26
TOP/END_GND
V
20
CAP_U
13
LM_LOAD
LM_LOAD
2
25
UL
MF_VCC
51
73
MIC SCK
12
16
CHIME_SCK
27
TAPE_TOP
V
1
(BLK)
21
21
N.C.
11
3
LM_UNLOAD
LM_UNLOAD
3
24
DEW(+)
23
54
TEMP
GND
ZM_RESET
53
75
MIC SDA
11
17
CHIME_SDA
1
CAP_V
2
FG1
22
22
FG1
3
22
24
NS_VCC
A_2.8V
GND
4
LM_UNLOAD
LM_UNLOAD
4
5
DEW(-)
22
ZM_RESET
ZM_RESET_VCC
55
ZM_RESET_VCC
ZM_B
57
BIAS+
59
77
MIC DVV
10
18
CHIME_VDD
2
CAP_V
3
MR Vcc
23
23
FG_VCC
2
20
ZM_A
LED_DA
LCD_ON/OFF
ZM_B
FG/PG COM
C_RESET
PS_OUT
YS_OUT
27
FC_RESET
DEW+
DEW+
5
6
MODE SW A
MODE SW B
MODE SW C
19
HALL+
MT_GND
MT_GND
61
79
Reel Sensor COM
9
19
HALL_VCC
3
CAP_V
4
24
12
10
1
PG
10
2
FG
9
1
GND
3
25
C COM
U
U
TEMP
DEW-
DEW-
6
21
20
MODE SW COM
18
81
Reel Sensor T(+)
4
SREEL+
8
9
2
YSDL
7
4
M COM
7
8
3
XSDL
6
5
DRUM_U
6
7
4
GND
6
5
6
DRUM_U
5
5
4
7
DRUM_V
4
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK(PS-30350)
1
5
6
3
8
DRUM_V
7
MODE_SW_A
MODE_SW_A
7
9
SW_COM/SW_GND 10
83
Reel Sensor T(-)
8
20
TREEL+
HU(-)
5
5
UHE-
CAP_V
25
20
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)
4
7
YODD
YEVEN
2
9
DRUM_W
8
MODE_SW_B
MODE_SW_B
8
SW_COM/SW_GND
85
Reel Sensor HALL(-)
7
21
TREEL-
HE Vcc
6
6
HE VCC
26
FG2
FG_VCC
SECTION 4
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
10P
CN101
10
3
8
GND
XODD
2
9
XEVEN
1
DRUM_W 10
CN008
MODE_SW_C
MODE_SW_C
9
10
BIAS-
87
Reel Sensor S(-)
6
22
HALL_GND
HU(+)
7
27
FG_GND
FG_GND
TO FH(2/2)
(SEE PAGE
4-3)
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)
4-3
J
I
H
BT001
BATTERY
TERMINAL
S
GND
1
BJ-1 BOARD
DIGITAL I/O
(LANC)
EXT MIC
J3101
TPB+
3
J3103
TPB5
AUDIO/VIDEO
GND
7
J3102
XLANC_JACK_IN
9
G
LANC_GND/232C_TD
11
F
GND
13
E
(SEE PAGE
4-2)
V_IO
15
TO FH(1/2)
GND
17
D
VC-245 BOARD
R_IO
19
C
6
GND
21
B
4
EXT_MIC_L
23
A
5
GND
25
2 3 1
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)
10
IB
27
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
12
UNREG
29
CN003 60P
60P
CN3103
2
GND
4
TPA+
6
TPA-
8
GND
UNREG
31
LANC_DC
38
UNREG
33
LANC_SIG
14
GND
16
AV_JACK_IN
18
GND
22
GND
20
L_IO
24
EXT_MIC_R
26
GND
28
GND
30
GND
32
GND
34
GND
36
GND
UNREG
35
44
42
40
7
CN3102
DV OUT
DV IN/OUT
(PC4E)
(PC5/PC5E)
UNREG2
39
GND
UNREG2
37
46
UNREG2
GND
48
41
GND
50
UNREG2
43
GND
52
UNREG3
45
GND
54
UNREG3
47
GND
56
UNREG3
49
GND
58
UNREG3
GND
UNREG4
51
GND
60
53
GND
UNREG4
55
GND
UNREG4
57
GND
UNREG4
59
CN3104
2P
8
UNREG
GND
1
2
CN006
CN005
7
8
KEY_AD2
GND
14
PANEL_15.5V
6
13
DISP_XHD
GND
12
DISP_XVD
5
11
GND
KEY_AD3
10
HI_SO
4
9
XCS_LCD
TP_TOP
8
XHI_SCK
3
7
LCD_4.6V
TP_BOT
6
LCD_13.5V
2
5
LCD_2.8V
TP_L
4
GND
1
3
PANEL_R
TP_R
2
PANEL_G
8P
1
PANEL_B
14P
(FOR CHECK)
CPC
HSY
5
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
BL-LOW
10
CN2101
8P
5P
14P
4-4
S3601
(PANEL REVERSE)
PR-34 BOARD
S3501
(PANEL OPEN)
PO-5 BOARD
PD-126 BOARD
GND
UNREG
N.C.
TP_TOP
TP_BOT
N.C.
TP_L
TP_R
PSIG
4
GND
COM
CN2105
PANEL_15.5V
XHD
XVD
REG_GND
HI_SO
XCS_PANEL
XHI_SCK
PANEL_4.6V
PANEL_13.5V
PANEL_2.8V
REG_GND
PANEL_R
PANEL_G
2
1
CN2100
PANEL_B
VG
3
BL-HIGH
PIEZO TRANS UNIT
1
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
BL-GND
11
CN2103
CN2104
3
N.C.
TP_R
TP_L
N.C.
TP_BOT
TP_TOP
N.C.(GND)
7P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
4
TEST2/SMON1
RGT/SLR
B/VB
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
R/VR
G/VG
PSIG/PVID
HCK1/GUD
HCK2/PCTL
CRext/PCTLB
SOUT/GPWC
REF/GPWCB
HST/GCK
WIDE/GCKB
CS/GSPB
VVSSG/GSP
HVDD/GVCC
VSS/GND
18
19
21
VVDD/SVDD
20
22
VST/SSP
VCK/SSPB
EN/SCK
23
COM/SMON2
DWN/SCKB
24
24P
TEST1/COMCNT
12
14
TOUTH
PANEL
LCD901
LCD
BACK-LIGHT
13
x
E
45 6
32 1
65 4
12 3
5
32 1
4
2
54 3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
Note :
The components identified by
mark 0 or dotted line with mark
0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number
specified.
Note :
Les composants identifiés par
une marque 0 sont critiques
pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une
pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
• Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX indicate
that they are not used.
In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated.
• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B,
unless otherwise noted.
• Signal name
XEDIT → EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC
• 2 : non flammable resistor
• 1 : fusible resistor
• C : panel designation
• A : B+ Line *
• B : B– Line *
•J
: IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE. *
• C : adjustment for repair. *
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms. *
* Indicated by the color red.
Temperature characteristics
External dimensions (mm)
Kinds of capacitor
(For schematic diagrams)
• All capacitors are in mF unless otherwise noted. pF : m mF. 50V
or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and tantalums.
• Chip resistors are 1/10W unless otherwise noted.
kW=1000W, MW=1000kW.
• Caution when replacing chip parts.
New parts must be attached after removal of chip.
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, Because it is damaged by the heat.
• Some chip part will be indicated as follows.
Example
C541
L452
22U
10UH
TA A
2520
B
C
4-5
1.5 m
A=B
TV)
T picture fr
A
B
H
Electron beam
scanned fr
A
When indicating parts by reference number, pleas include
the board name.
Fig.b (Picture on monitor
B
ame
2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of Fig. a and
the Fig. b can be obtain.
CR
Fig.
a (Video output ter
P
• Voltages and waveforms are measured between the measurement points and ground when camera shoots color bar chart of
pattern box. They are reference values and reference waveforms. *
of impedance
the lens is used.).
(VOM of DC 10 MΩront
input
• Voltage values change depending upon input impedance of VOM
used.) *
F
atter
ame
1. Connection
n bo voltage and waveform)
(Measuring conditions
Yellow
(For printed wiring boards)
• b: Pattern from the side which enables seeing.
(The other layers' patterns are not indicated.)
• Through hole is omitted.
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.
• There are few cases that the part printed on diagram
isn’t mounted in this model.
• Chip parts.
Transistor
Diode
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
minal output w
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
Cyan
Green
Yellow
Cyan
Green
White
Magenta
Red
Blue
White
Magenta
Red
Blue
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
H
16
1
V3
2
14
C3201
10u
10V
TA A
C3207
2200p
B
5
1
2
3
V2
12
13
6
3
4
5
4
R12.2/P0
8
CCD IMAGER
IC3201
2
3
4
5
6
ZM_XB
ZM_A
ZM_B
NS_VCC
GND
19
20
21
22
23
24
ZM_RESET
ZM_RESET_VCC
BIAS+
HALL+
BIAS-
27
18
GND
26
17
MF_A
MF_VCC
25
16
GND
HALL-
15
MF_B
DRIVE+
14
FC_B
DRIVE-
13
FC_A
11
12
10
FC_XB
GND
9
8
FC_XA
FC_RESET_VCC
TEMP
7
1
ZM_XA
8
4-13
DRIVE-
DRIVE+
HALL-
BIAS-
HALL+
BIAS+
ZM_RESET_VCC
ZM_RESET
MF_VCC
MF_A
MF_B
FC_B
FC_A
FC_XB
FC_XA
FC_RESET_VCC
TEMP
FC_RESET
NS_VCC
ZM_B
ZM_A
ZM_XB
L3201
100uH
2520
0
CCD_OUT
CAM_12V
MSUB
Q3202
UN9213J-(K8).SO
R6.9/P0
R3202
0
ZM_XA
C3206 C3203 C3204 C3205
XX
XX
22u
0.1u
CH
B
16V
F
TA B 1608
FC_RESET
27P
R3201
3300
R8.8/P0
C3202
10p
CH
7
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R :REC MODE
P :PB MODE
7
6
R9.6/P0
CN3351
8
9
7
6
C3208
0.1u
B
2012
10
LENS-EVF
BLOCK
11
R1.6/P0
-REF.NO.:10000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
R6.9/P0
CCD IMAGER(CD BLOCK)
ICX228BCK
IC3201
V4
CAM_-6.5V
R-6.4/P0
V3
R-6.4/P0
V4
VL
R-0.2/P0
SUB
R-6.8/
P0.3
SUB
R-0.2/P0
V1
R1.4/P0
V2
H2
R6.8/
P0
H2
V1
H1
H1
V_HOLD
RG
RG
R12.2/P0
VDD
GND
V_DRAIN
CCD_OUT
B
4
R10.4/P0
A
5
CF-75 BOARD(1/2)
1
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-7 for CF-75 printed wiring board.
• Refer to page 4-77 for CF-75 board waveforms.
Q3201
2SC4178-F13F14-T1
BUFFER
CCD_OUT
MSUB
H2
H1
RG
SUB
ZM_XB
ZM_B
ZM_RESET_VCC
ZM_RESET
FC_XB
FC_B
FC_RESET_VCC
BIAS+
BIAS-
DRIVE-
MF_A
YS_OUT
C_RESET
XEVF_SW
LED_ON/OFF
VCK
EN
RGT
HCK2
BLK
R
COM
GND
41
43
87
85
83
81
79
77
75
73
71
69
67
65
63
61
59
57
55
53
51
49
47
CCD_GND
CCD_OUT
CCD_GND
MSUB
H_GND
H2
H1
RG
H_GND
VSHT
MT_GND
(SEE PAGE 4-54)
TO VC-245 BOARD CN001
XF_TALLY_LED
NS_LED_K
MT_GND
ZM_XB
ZM_B
ZM_RESET_VCC
ZM_RESET
MT_GND
FC_XB
FC_B
FC_RESET_VCC
BIASBIAS+
39
GND
DRIVE-
35
37
GND
GND
MF_A
33
YS_OUT
31
C_RESET
XEVF_SW
29
45
88P
LED_ON/OFF
LCD_4.6V
LCD_4.6V
GND
VCK
EN
RGT
HCK2
BLK
R
COM
CN3354
27
25
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
9
B
G
CCD_GND
CCD_GND
CAM_-6.5V
CAM_12V
H_GND
V1
V2
V3
V4
H_GND
SIRCS_SIG
MT4.8V
MT4.8V
GND
ZM_XA
ZM_A
NS_VCC
TEMP
GND
FC_XA
FC_A
FC_RESET
GND
HALL+
HALL-
GND
DRIVE+
GND
MF_B
MF_VCC
PS_OUT
A_2.8V
GND
LED_DA
GND
GND
EVF_VCC
VST
STB
DWN
HST
HCK1
10
88
86
84
82
80
78
76
74
72
70
68
66
64
62
60
58
56
54
52
50
48
46
44
42
40
38
36
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
CAM_-6.5V
CAM_12V
V1
V2
V3
V4
ZM_XA
ZM_A
NS_VCC
TEMP
FC_XA
FC_A
FC_RESET
HALL+
HALL-
DRIVE+
MF_B
MF_VCC
PS_OUT
LED_DA
EVF_VCC
VST
STB
DWN
HST
HCK1
B
G
11
R3351
3300
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN3353
GND
GND
GND
YS_OUT
PS_OUT
C_RESET
A_2.8V
XEVF_SW
LED_DA
LED_ON/OFF
LCD_4.6V
EVF_VCC
VST
VCK
STB
EN
DWN
RGT
HST
HCK2
HCK1
BLK
B
R
G
COM
GND
SIRCS_SIG
LCD_4.6V
XF_TALLY_LED
TALLY_LED_A
NS_LED_K
MT_4.8V
8P
2 TO(2/2)
1 TO(2/2)
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D005
DCZ2805
(NIGHT SHOT)
D006
DCZ2805
D003
TLSU1002(TPX1,SONY)
(TALLY)
PB
REC
CHROMA
CF-75 (1/2)
CCD IMAGER
4.6
2.8
NS-12
Y/CHROMA
/ REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER
Y
4
IC001
RS-70-TU
3
1
IC001
2
15
REMOTE COMMANDER
RECEIVER
VIDEO SIGNAL
SIGNAL PATH
LENS-EVF BLOCK is replaced as a block.
So that this PRINTED WIRING and
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM is omitted.
MT_4.8V
NS_LED_K
TALLY_LED_A
XF_TALLY_LED
LCD_4.6V
SIRCS_SIG
GND
GND
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
-REF.NO.:10000 SERIES-
REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER
NS-12 BOARD
14
Precautions Upon Replacing CCD imager
• The CF-75 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped with
a CCD imager.
When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the
old one and mount it onto the new one.
• If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the
adjustments for the camera section.
• As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from
its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC.
In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts
nor exposed to strong light.
YS_OUT
PS_OUT
C_RESET
XEVF_SW
LED_DA
LED_ON/OFF
EVF_VCC
VST
VCK
STB
EN
DWN
RGT
HST
HCK2
HCK1
BLK
B
R
G
COM
12
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
CF-75 (2/2)
PITCH, YAW SENSOR
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
16
1
TO(1/2)
1
R2204
0
R2215
100k
11
R3454
22k
R0/P1.9
8
13
7
R0/
P4.6
R0/
P1.3
R2218
100k
6
15
5
C3462
10u
B
16
4
17
3
R3458
15k
C3464
0.33u
B
2012
18
R2212
47
R2213
47
R0/
P0.6
R0/
P1.3
R0/
P1.3
R3455
10k R3457
1M
C3460
10u B
3216
R0/P0.6
C3461
10u B
3216
14
Q2203-2206
LED DRIVER
C3458
0.047u
B
12
R2211
2200
R2217
100k
R2209
5600
9
R2210
XX
C3456
0.047u
B
R2208
1500
R2216
100k
R0/
P1.9
10
C3459
0.047u
B
7
2
19
NC
..
NC
..
LED2
VCC2
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
EN
STB
VCK
VST
GND
4-15
1
7
EVF_VCC
RGT
8
VDD
VSS
VST
VCK
STB
EN
DWN
HST
9
HST
RGT
HCK2
HCK1
BLK
B
R
G
DWN
10
11
12
13
14
COM
LED1
5
8
C3466
0.1u
B
L3451
10uH
CN2202
16P
6P
LCD902
LCD
UNIT
IC3451
UPC6756GR-8JG-E2
PITCH,YAW
SENSOR AMP
IC3451
C3465
22u
4V
TA P
CN2201
VCC1
6
HCK2
HCK1
BLK
B
R
1
20
15
(EVF ON/OFF)
R3453
22k
R2207
8200
C3454
0.1u
B
TH2201
R2203
8200
R2205
8200
R2206
33k
R3451
22k
C3455
0.1u
B
R3452
22k
C3457
0.047u
B
6
16
S2201
R0/P2.8
Q2207
UN9213J-(K8).SO
R4.4/P0
R0/
P4.6
C2203
0.047u
Q2202
NDS356AP
R4.4/
P0
4.6
R2201
470k
Q2202-2207
LED ON/OFF
SWITCH
C2202
0.1u
R2202
XX
C3453
22u
4V
TA P
C3452
22u
4V
TA P
5
G
R2214
33k
C2201
10u
6.3V
(YAW SENSOR)
SE3451
(PITCH SENSOR)
SE3450
3
COM
XEVF_SW
GND
LED_ON/OFF
LED_DA
LCD_4.6V
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R :REC MODE
P :PB MODE
-REF.NO.:10000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
PITCH,YAW SENSOR
(SE BLOCK)
4
LIB2
2 3
0.7
LIA2
1
0.9
LO2
C3463
10u B
1.4
HI2
CF-75 BOARD(2/2)
1.3
Vref2
2
1
2
AM2
4
3
4
1.4
R3459
1M
1.4
R3456
10k
AM1
R1.2/P0.6
OUT2
1.4
C_RESET
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-7 for printed wiring board.
R0/P2.5
GND
0.6
LIB1
0.8
LIA1
1.2
VCC
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
Q2203
2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
1.2
1.4
HO2
Q2205
2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
LO1
Q2204
2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
HI1
1.3
HO1
1.3
Vref1
1.3
PASS
2.8
OUT1
0
Q2206
2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
ND902
BACK-LIGHT
9
2
TO(1/2)
CHROMA
Y
4-16
Note :
The components identified by
mark 0 or dotted line with mark
0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number
specified.
PB
REC
11
VIDEO SIGNAL
SIGNAL PATH
YS_OUT
C_RESET
PS_OUT
A_2.8V
GND
10
Note :
Les composants identifiés par
une marque 0 sont critiques
pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une
pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
Y/CHROMA
12
13
D
C
B
A
DEW
SENSOR
FLEXIBLE
FP-228
1
M
FLEXIBLE
FP-100
S902
MODE
SWITCH
M903
LOADING
MOTOR
2 3
6
7
8
MODE A
MODE B
16
SW_COM
10
9
5
DEW-
MODE C
4
DEW+
3
LM_UNLOAD
2
1
LM_LOAD
LM_LOAD
LM_UNLOAD
12
11
XCCDOWN_SW
10
SW_COM/SW_GND
9
XMODE_SW_C
8
XMODE_SW_B
7
XMODE_SW_A
6
DEW-
5
DEW+
4
LM_UNLOAD
3
LM_UNLOAD
2
LM_LOAD
1
LM_LOAD
4-61
FLEXIBLE
FP-102
13
TAPE_LED_K
CN901
4P
S901
(REC PROOF)
+
14
TAPE_LED_A
G
G
-
H901
S REEL
SENSOR
Vcc
H902
T REEL
SENSOR
+
Q901
TAPE END
SENSOR
Q902
TAPE TOP
SENSOR
15
MIC/REC_SW_GND
D901
(TAPE LED)
16
XREC_PROOF
S903
(CC DOWN)
17
CHIME_SCK
-
18
CHIME_SDA
Vcc
19
CHIME_VDD
TO VC-245 BOARD CN008
20
HALL_VCC
7
21
TREEL+
6
22
TREEL-
5
23
HALL_GND
4
24
SREEL-
H901
S REEL
SENSOR
H902
T REEL
SENSOR
25
SREEL+
Q901
TAPE END
SENSOR
26
TAPE_END
FP-102 FLEXIBLE BOARD
27P
— Ref. No. FP-100, 102, 228 Flexible Board; 7,000 Series —
CN901
S901
(REC PROOF)
FP-100 (MODE SWITCH), FP-228 (DEW SENSOR), FP-102 (TAPE TOP/END SENSOR, S/T REEL) FLEXIBLE BOARDS
27
TAPE_TOP
TOP/END_GND
M
11
FP-100, FP-228
MODE SWITCH, DEW SENSOR
FP-102
1-677-085-
1
10
1
1
10
11
/ TAPE TOP/END SENSOR, S/T REEL
S902
MODE SWITCH
FP-100 FLEXIBLE BOARD
D901
(TAPE LED)
FP-228
FLEXIBLE BOARD
1-677-049-
DEW
SENSOR
M903
LOADING
MOTOR
S903
(CC DOWN)
Q902
TAPE TOP
SENSOR
27
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
16
2 3
S
EJECT
G
XVTR_MODE_SW
MEMORY
CAMERA
OFF
VCR
POWER
(POWER)
XPHOTO_STBY_SW
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
BS
VCC
DI0
NC
INS
NC
SLCK
VCC
VSS
2
4
5
6
7
8
XVTR_MODE_SW
XEJECT_SW
XS/S_SW
POWER_LED_VCC
XPOWER_LED
3
1
XCAM+STBY_SW
GND
8P
XPHOTO_STBY_SW
CN4004
GND
LND4001
11
VSS
S4006
4
RESET
4-65
R4006
1k
BT4001
(LITHIUM BATTERY)
FB4004
FB4003
D4002
TLSU1008(T05,SOY)
(ACCESS)
FB4002
FB4001
CASE-GND
11P
R4008
0
VDR4005
VDR4004
VDR4003
PC5/PC5E ONLY
CN4001
LND4005
GND
XCAM_MODE_SW
START/STOP
S
VDR4001
VDR4002
Y
MEMORY
STICK
CONNECTOR
4HPIN
2HPL
1GND
3HPR
G
C
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK(FK-30350)
PC5/PC5E ONLY
(HEADPHONE)
J4002
S VIDEO
J4001
-REF.NO.:50000 SERIES-
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(FK-30350)
1
5
R4005
1200
BACK LIGHT
S4010
MIC901
S4007
S4011
INFINITY
S4008
FOCUS
DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL
(MIC R)
(MIC L)
SP901
SPEAKER
6
GND
SP-
SP+
560
6
5
4
3
2
1
R4001
3300
1608
PHOTO
(REC)
S4005
PHOTO
(FREEZE)
R4007
MIC-R
GND
MIC-L
S4004
6P
R4002
1500
1608
R4003
1200
1608
CN4003
7
8
9
WIDE
TELE
RV4001
(ZOOM)
SUPER NIGHTSHOT
S4003
PB
REC
CHROMA
SP+
CN4002
GND
39
GND
LND4003
GND
LND4004
GND
KEY_AD1R
KEY_AD0
38
37
ZOOM_SW_AD
PHOTO_FREEZE
36
35
KEY_AD1
D_2.8V
34
33
XPOWER_LED
XS/S_SW
32
XEJECT_SW
POWER_LED_VCC
31
30
XPHOTO_STBY_SW
26
XCAM+STBY_SW
VSS
25
29
VCC
24
XVTR_MODE_SW
SCLK
23
28
INS
22
27
DI0
21
BS
MS_LED
19
20
POWER_LED_VCC
18
XRESET_SW
GND
BATT_LI_3V
17
16
HP_L
15
HP_R
HP_JACK_IN
XS_JACK_IN
S_C_I/O
14
13
12
11
10
S_Y_I/O
YG-GND
8
9
7
GND
MIC_R
6
MIC_L
GND
SP-
39P
Y/CHROMA
LND4002
GND
5
4
3
2
1
Y
VIDEO SIGNAL
SIGNAL PATH
(SEE PAGE
4-53)
TO
VC-245 BOARD(19/19)
CN002
AUDIO
SIGNAL
10
4-66
FK-30350
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
16
TO
PD-126 BOARD
(1/2)
CN2101
7 8 PIN
ACV+
LND312
(SEE PAGE
4-73)
BT001
BATTERY
TERMINAL
s
IB
LND311
GND
LND316
J3101
GND
LND315
AUDIO/VIDEO
J3103
(LANC)
DIGITAL I/O
J3102
PC5/PC5E
DV OUT
PC4E
-REF.NO.: SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
JACK,BATTERY
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
GND
L
V
BR
SW
R
NC
4 R
1 GND
2 L
3 S
R3111
0
R3112
0
3
1
GND
LANC_DC
JACK_IN
SIG
232C_TD
1
2
UNREG
GND
CN3104
2P
FB3101
0uH
2
D3101
MAZJ200D0LS0
3
2
5
1
4
TPA
4P
4
FB3104
0uH
1
NTPA
3
DV IN/OUT
TPB
2
NTPB
CN3102
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R :REC MODE
P :PB MODE
2
1
D3102
015AZ8.2-TPL3
1
2
EXT MIC
VDR311
C3101
0.001u
B
FB3103
0uH
FB3102
0uH
VDR312
R3105
0
4-69
PS3104
2A
PS3103
2A
PS3102
2A
C3103
0.001u
B
R3110
0
FB3106
0uH
PS3101
2A
VDR313
4
R3101
0
FB3105
0uH
VDR319
R3102
0
R3103
0
LND314
GND
1
2
BJ-1 BOARD
2 3
VDR316
1
2
D3103
015AZ8.2-TPL3
1
2
1
2
1
VDR315
2
1
2
5
6
LND313
GND
7
CN3103
30
GND
GND
Y
VIDEO SIGNAL
CHROMA
AUDIO
SIGNAL
Note :
Les composants identifiés par
une marque 0 sont critiques
pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une
pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
Y/CHROMA
60
4-70
GND
GND
GND 58
UNEG4
57
59
GND
UNEG4 56
55
GND
UNEG4 54
53
GND
GND
UNEG3 52
51
GND
UNEG3 48
UNEG3 50
49
GND 44
UNEG2
UNEG3 46
43
47
41
45
GND 40
UNEG2
UNEG2
GND 42
39
UNEG4
GND
UNEG2 38
37
GND
36
UNEG
34
UNEG
35
32
UNEG
33
31
Note :
The components identified by
mark 0 or dotted line with mark
0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number
specified.
PB
REC
TO VC-245 BOARD(19/19)
CN003
GND
28
UNEG
GND
GND
26
29
GND
25
27
GND
EXT_MIC_R
22
(SEE PAGE 4-54)
GND
GND
XAV_JACK_IN
GND
20
18
16
LANC_DC
24
EXT_MIC_L
L_IO
GND
14
12
GND
TPA-
TPA+
23
IB
R_IO
V_IO
GND
8
11
21
19
17
15
13
LANC_SIG_JACK
9
11
GND
GND
10
XLANC_JACK_IN
7
6
TPB-
4
2
TPB+
60P
10
5
LANC_GND/232C_TD
GND
9
3
1
SIGNAL PATH
8
BJ-1
JACK, BATTERY
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
L
D
M
H
B
16
TO(2/2)
TOUCH
PANEL
BLOCK
(SEE PAGE
4-69)
TO
BJ-1 BOARD
CN3104
(SEE PAGE
4-53)
TO
VC-245 BOARD
(19/19)
CN006
(SEE PAGE
4-39)
TO
VC-245 BOARD
(12/19)
CN005
HI_SO 10
XHD 13
XVD 12
REG_GND 11
8
UNREG_GND
LED_ON/OFF
DET
BL_LEV
BL_ON
PWM
PANEL_4.6V
UNREG_GND
4
5
6
7
N.C.
TP_BOT
TP_TOP
N.C.
3
7
TP_L
6
N.C.
UNREG
2
5
TP_TOP
1
4
TP_BOT
N.C.
3
N.C.
TP_R
2
TP_L
7P
1
TP_R
8P
PANEL_15.5V 14
UNREG
CN2103
CN2101
7
9
6
PANEL_4.6V
8
5
PANEL_2.8V
PANEL_13.5V
XHI_SCK
4
REG_GND
XCS_PANEL
3
XHD
XVD
XHI_SO
XCS_PANEL
XHI_SCK
0
4.5
2.8
2.8
C2102
0.1u
0.1
C2104
10u
6.3V
TA
P
C2135
XX
R2166
10k
L2102
10uH
2520
C2134
XX
4-73
Q2112
XP4313-(TX).SO
Q2112
LED ON/OFF SW,
BUFFER
0
R2175 0
0
R2173
R2174
C2101
22u
6.3V
TA
A
L2101
22uH
2520
C2103
0.01u
B
PANEL_R
R2168
0
C2105
0.1u
C2136
XX
2.8
R2110
XX
XCS_PANEL
XHD
XVD
XHI_SO
XTG_SO
R_IN
G_IN
B_IN
XP.SAVE
LPF_ADJ
TRAP_ADJ
Vcc1
XCS
SI
XSCK
XC.SAVE
0
C2132
XX
2.8
0.7
1.2
3
2
1
36
0.8
2.8
2
34
3
33
2.7
2.6
2.2
2.6
2.9
2.5
2.5
1.4
1.4
0
2.8
2.7
XVD
VDO
SI
SO
XCS
VDD
XSCK
PFRP
FRP
SBLK
PRG
2.6
2.8
31
1.4
30
IC2101
RB5P004AM1
5
RGB DRIVE
2.8
2.8
36
7
35
0.8
2
9
2.6
1
0
1.4
6
7
1.4
29
IC2101
R2176
0
0.8
XCLP
0
32
BLK
0.8
4
Q2111
2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
1
35
EXT_DA
R2114
15k
C_BG/N.C
C2107 R2170
100k
0.1u
1608 2.8
D2101
MA111-TX
XHI_SCK
PFRP
FRP
BLK
PRG
BGP
R2112
470k
R2113
0
1.8
1.8
C2110
0.01u
1.8
C2108
0.01u
C2109
0.01u
2.8
1.2
2.8
2.9
2.6
2.5
2.8
1.2
R2169
0
XP.SAVE
XCS_PANEL
XTG_SO
XHI_SCK
XC.SAVE
R2111
470k
C2130
0.01u
R_INJECT
2
N.C
BGP
BGP
1
SH_G
PANEL_B
C2106 XX
PRG
FRP
FRP
PANEL_G
XX
R2109
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
CN2100
1.4
8
34
0.8
R2118
22k
R2116
47k
BIAS
LCD DRIVE
2.7
3
28
9
0.8
33
4
2.8
6.8
1.4
10
26
4
5
6
31
2.8
C2131
XX
3.2
12
29
1.4 2.8
R2119
68k
C2113
0.1u
2012
30
1.6
11
25
1.7
5
IC2103
CXD3505R-T4
TIMING GENERATOR
IC2103
32
27
C2111
560p
CH
2.8
C2112
2.2u
2012
L2103
10uH
2520
VP
-REF.NO.:30000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
XVP.SAVE
10
XSH.SAVE
SH1
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
OP_IN-
9
SH_R
SH2
2.7
SH_A
XCLR
Vcc2
PRG
HD
SH_B
SH3
BLACK_IN
SH4
PFRP
SH3
N.C
SH1
SHR
SH2
SHG
P_DC_DET
PFRP
XWRT
R2115
2700
HDO
OP_IN+
SHB
8
DETIN
7
6
GND
SH4
SHA
OP_OUT
GND
COM_DC
RPD
R2117
68k
BL
VCO
TESTI
7
VG
28
1.3
R2125
XX
R2122
1M
R2124
100k
6.5
9
1.0
10
26
C2119
2.2u
11
25
12
8
C2118
2.2u
2.8
2.8
NC
POFF
RGT
HCK1
HCK2
HST
VDD
WIDE
DWN
EN
VCK
VST
0
2.8
0
0
0.1
1.6
2.7
1.2
1.9
0.8
2.8
0
R2128
XX
R2126
XX
R2177
100k
C2122
XX
F
R2171
XX
VR
VG
R2179
100k
R2135
XX
R2129
0
R2178
100k
TG43
TG47
TG10
TG11
TG12
TG13
TG14
TG15
TG16
TG17
TG18
TG19
TG20
TG21
TG22
TG23
TG24
R2180
100k
VB
R2165
0
L2105
XX
2520
VP
13
C2121
XX
F
R2127
XX
C2137
XX
C2120
2.2u
1.3
C2117
100p
CH
C2116
0.001u
L2104
2.7uH
27
0
6.2
6.2
14.4
6.7
1.7
6.8
1.7
6.8
1.7
6.8
D2102
1T369-01-T8A
R2123
COM_IN
COM_OUT
Vcc3
VREF
GND1
GND2
R_DC_DET
VR
G_DC_DET
2.2 0 1.8
8
VB
14.4
C2115
3.3u
20V
TA
A
12 11
B_DC_DET
XC.SAVE
XCSAVE
PD-126 BOARD(1/2)
6
TESTI
A
5
OSCI
XP.SAVE
4
PWM
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
OSCO
C2114
0.01u
LED
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
XSTBY
VB
1
TEST
VR
R2134 10
14
13
TEST
VG
R2136 10
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-77 for waveforms.
TEST
VP
R2138 100
R2137 10
13
C
2 3
TG47
TG43
TG15
TG16
TG17
TG19
R2143
10k
6.2
Q2101
XP4601-TXE
15.1
R2146
R2145
6.8
0
7.3
R2150
XX
R2153
Q2108
XX
R2154
XX
C2138
XX
1608
R2158
68k
R2155
XX
R2160
820k
(Note)
C2129
4-74
C2127
0.1u
R2157
1M
150k
0
D2103
XX
R2159
C2128
0.1u
R2162
0
R2161
XX
15
Note:Short is mounted to the location
where C2129 is printed.
Q2106
XX
6.8
0
Q2107
XX
R2151
XX
R2152
XX
Q2103
XP4601-TXE
15.1
R2172
0
C2126
4.7u
3216
Q2105
XX
C2125
0.01u
15.1
R2147
0
0
R2149
XX
6.2
R2148
10k
7.3
6.8
XX
R2163 0
XX
R2142
TG10
XX
R2140
XX
XX
R2139
R2141
6.8
2.8
0
Q2104
NDS356AP
Q2102
UN9213J-(TX).SO
C2124
0.01u
TG11
TG18
TG20
TG12
TG13
TG21
TG22
TG23
TG24
TG16
TG15
TG14
C2123
3.3u
20V
TA A
R2144
470k
15.1
Q2102,2104
SWITCH
14
Q2109
2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO
C2133
D2104
RD3.3UM-T1B
D2105
XX
17
1u
PB
REC
VG
COM
GND
PSIG
HSY
3
4
5
5P
CN2105
1
2
TEST2
2
1
RGT
3
24P
B
4
Y
CN2104
PSIG
R
5
HCK1
G
6
CRext
7
SOUT
HCK2
REF
10
8
HST
11
9
WIDE
12
VVSSG
13
VDDG
CS
VSS
14
15
VDD
16
DWN
18
17
19
COM
VCK
EN
22
20
23
21
TEST1
VST
24
CHROMA
VIDEO SIGNAL
SIGNAL PATH
18
16
(FOR CHECK)
CPC
LCD901
2.5 INCH
COLOR LCD UNIT
Y/CHROMA
PD-126 (1/2)
LCD DRIVE
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
PD-126 (2/2)
LCD DRIVE
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
4-75
E
D
C
B
A
2 3
16
TO(1/2)
DET
LED_ON/OFF
BL_LEV
PWM
BL_ON
UNREG_GND
PANEL_4.6V
UNREG
C2181
100u
6.3V
B
TA
-REF.NO.:30000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
LCD DRIVE
R2185
XX
R2184
0
C2182
0.1u
B
PD-126 BOARD(2/2)
1
C2183
100u
6.3V
B
TA
L2182
100uH
L2181
4.7uH
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-71 for printed wiring board.
C2184
0.1u
B
4.5
C2186
0.1u
4.5
R2183
100
2.7
R2181
4700
3.8
5
0
D2181
PG1111R-TR
4.5
6
VDD
LND282
PANEL_UNREG
LND281
BL_PWM
LND284
INVERTER UNIT
7
Note :
The components identified by
mark 0 or dotted line with mark
0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number
specified.
4-76
UNREG_GND
LND283
Q2181
UN9214J-(K8).SO
Q2182
2SA1832F-Y/GR(TPL3)
R2186
XX
R2182
1k
4.5
Q2181,2182
SWITCH
Q2183
LED DRIVER
1.5
Q2183
UN9112J-(K8).SO
C2185
10u
10V
A
4
BL_LOW
BL_GND
BL_HI
DET
LND285
DUMY_LND
9
Note :
Les composants identifiés par
une marque 0 sont critiques
pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une
pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
8
ND901
BACK-LIGHT
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
4-3. WAVEFORMS
PD-126 BOARD (1/2)
CF-75 BOARD
CAMERA REC
REC/PB
1 IC2101 rh
1 IC3201 1
9 IC2103 rk
400mVp-p
7.7Vp-p
H
H
2.8Vp-p
V
2 IC2101 rj
2 IC3201 2
9.2Vp-p
400mVp-p
V
H
3 IC2101 rk
3 IC3201 3
7.8Vp-p
450mVp-p
H
H
4 IC2101 w;
4 IC3201 4
8.6Vp-p
7.4Vp-p
V
2H
5 IC2101 ws
5 IC3201 qd
20.8Vp-p
H
7.4Vp-p
2H
6 IC2101 wf
6 IC3201 qa, qs
7.4Vp-p
3.5Vp-p
2H
H
7 IC2103 1
7 IC3201 0
2.8Vp-p
3.2Vp-p
H
55.6 nsec
8 IC2103 wh
8 Q3201 E
1.0Vp-p
0.44 µsec
3.0Vp-p
56 nsec
4-77
WAVEFORMS
CF-75, PD-126
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION
CF-75 BOARD (SIDE A)
NS-12 BOARD (SIDE A)
BJ-1 BOARD (SIDE A)
PD-126 BOARD (SIDE A)
C2201
C2202
C2203
C3201
C3202
C3203
C3205
C3206
C3207
C3208
C3454
C3455
C3456
C3457
C3458
C3459
C3460
C3461
D003
D005
D006
A-2
A-2
A-1
C3101
C3103
IC001
A-1
C2101
C2102
C2103
C2104
C2105
C2106
C2107
C2108
C2109
C2110
C2111
C2112
C2113
C2114
C2115
C2116
C2117
C2118
C2119
C2120
C2121
C2122
C2123
C2124
C2125
C2126
C2127
C2128
C2129
C2130
C2131
C2132
C2133
C2134
C2135
C2136
C2137
C2138
C2181
C2182
C2183
C2184
C2185
C2186
C-1
D-1
D-1
C-1
C-1
D-1
C-1
D-1
D-1
C-1
C-2
D-2
C-2
D-2
D-3
C-2
C-2
D-2
D-3
D-2
C-2
C-2
C-3
C-3
C-3
B-3
C-3
B-3
B-2
D-1
C-2
C-1
B-2
D-1
D-1
C-1
D-2
C-3
C-3
B-3
C-3
C-3
C-3
D-3
CN2100
CN2101
CN2103
CN2104
CN2105
C-1
B-1
B-3
B-2
D-3
D2101
D2102
D2103
D2104
D2105
D2181
C-1
C-2
B-2
B-2
B-3
A-3
B-4
B-4
B-4
C-6
C-7
C-7
C-7
C-7
C-6
A-4
E-3
E-3
E-3
E-3
E-3
E-3
E-4
E-4
CN2202 E-1
CN3351 A-4
CN3353 A-4
IC3201 D-6
IC3451 E-4
L3201
C-7
Q2202
Q2203
Q2204
Q2205
Q2206
Q2207
Q3201
Q3202
B-4
E-1
E-1
E-1
E-1
B-4
C-7
C-7
R2201
R2202
R2203
R2204
R2205
R2206
R2207
R2208
R2209
R2210
R2211
R2212
R2213
R2214
R2215
R2216
R2217
R2218
R3201
R3202
R3351
R3452
R3453
R3454
R3455
R3456
R3457
R3459
B-4
B-4
E-1
B-4
E-1
E-1
E-1
E-1
E-1
E-1
E-1
E-1
E-1
E-4
E-4
E-4
E-4
E-4
C-7
C-7
A-4
E-3
E-3
E-3
E-4
E-4
E-4
E-4
S2201
E-5
CF-75 BOARD (SIDE B)
C3204
C3452
C3453
C3462
C3463
C3464
C3465
C3466
C-9
E-12
E-12
E-12
E-12
E-12
E-12
E-12
CN3102 C-3
CN3103 B-6
CN3104 F-9
D3101
D3102
D3103
C-2
C-2
C-2
FB3101
FB3102
FB3103
FB3104
FB3105
FB3106
A-2
A-2
A-2
B-2
B-2
B-2
J3101
J3102
J3103
G-2
E-2
F-2
PS3101
PS3102
PS3103
PS3104
E-9
E-9
E-9
E-9
R3101
R3102
R3103
R3105
R3110
R3111
R3112
B-1
C-2
B-2
C-2
B-1
B-2
A-2
VDR311
VDR312
VDR313
VDR315
VDR316
VDR319
B-2
B-2
B-2
A-2
A-2
C-2
CN2201 E-15
CN3354 B-10
L3451
E-12
R3451
R3458
E-12
E-12
SE3450 E-12
SE3451 E-12
IC2101 D-2
IC2103 B-2
TH2201 E-15
PARTS LOCATION
CF-75, NS-12, BJ-1, PD-126
A-2
A-2
4-82E
L2101
L2102
L2103
L2104
L2105
L2181
L2182
C-1
C-1
D-2
C-2
B-1
C-3
C-3
Q2101
Q2102
Q2103
Q2104
Q2105
Q2106
Q2107
D-3
C-3
C-3
C-3
C-2
B-2
B-1
Q2108
Q2109
Q2111
Q2112
Q2181
Q2182
Q2183
B-1
B-3
C-2
B-3
C-3
D-3
B-3
R2109
R2110
R2111
R2112
R2113
R2114
R2115
R2116
R2117
R2118
R2119
R2122
R2123
R2124
R2125
R2126
R2127
R2128
R2129
R2134
R2135
R2136
R2137
R2138
R2139
R2140
R2141
R2142
R2144
R2145
R2146
R2147
R2148
R2149
R2150
R2151
R2152
R2153
R2154
R2155
R2157
R2158
R2159
R2160
R2161
R2162
R2163
R2165
R2166
R2168
R2169
R2170
R2171
R2172
R2173
R2174
R2175
R2176
R2177
R2178
R2179
R2180
R2181
R2182
R2183
R2184
R2185
R2186
D-1
D-1
D-1
C-1
B-1
D-2
C-2
C-2
C-2
C-2
C-2
C-2
C-3
C-2
C-2
C-3
D-3
C-3
C-2
C-3
C-2
C-2
C-3
C-3
B-2
B-2
B-2
B-2
C-3
C-3
B-1
C-3
C-3
B-2
B-3
C-2
B-3
B-3
B-3
A-3
B-3
C-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-2
C-2
B-3
B-3
D-1
D-1
C-2
D-3
B-3
D-1
D-1
C-1
C-2
B-3
C-2
C-2
C-2
D-3
D-3
A-4
B-2
D-2
D-3
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
SECTION 5
ADJUSTMENTS
1.
Before starting adjustment
EVR Data Re-writing Procedure When Replacing Board
The data that is stored in the repair board, is not necessarily correct.
Perform either procedure 1 or procedure 2 or procedure 3 when replacing board.
Procedure 1
Save the EVR data of the machine in which a board is going to be replaced. Download the saved data after a board
is replaced.
(Machine before starting repair)
PC
PC
(Machine after a board is replaced)
Download the saved
data to a machine.
Save the EVR data
to a personal computer.
Procedure 2
Remove the EEPROM from the board of the machine that is going to be repaired. Install the removed EEPROM
to the replaced board.
Remove the EEPROM and install it.
(Former board)
(New board)
Procedure 3
When the data cannot be saved due to defective EEPROM, or when the EEPROM cannot be removed or
installed, save the data from the same model of the same destination, and download it.
(Machine to be repaired)
PC
(Machine to be repaired)
Download the data.
Save the data.
(The same model of the same destination)
After the EVR data is saved and downloaded, check the
respective items of the EVR data.
(Refer to page 5-3 for the items to be checked.)
5-1
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards.
• Adjusting items when replacing main parts
When replacing main parts, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.
Note1: When replacing the drum assy. or the mechanism deck, reset the data of page: 2, address: A2 to A4 to “00”. (Refer to “Record of Use check” of “54. SERVICE MODE”)
Replaced parts
IC101 (EQ, A/D CONV., PLL)
IC102 (REC/PB AMP)
VC-245 board
VC-245 board
IC1301 (LINE IN/OUT AMP)
IC301 (DV signal process)
VC-245 board
VC-245 board
IC751 (Camera process, EVR)
IC204 (Lens pre-driver)
VC-245 board
IC701 (CDS, AGC, A/D conv.)
VC-245 board
VC-245 board
IC3201 (CCD imager)
CF-75 board
IC702, X701 (Timing generator)
IC1803 (Timing generator (EVF))
VC-245 board
VC-245 board
IC2103 (Timing generator (LCD))
IC1802 (RGB driver (EVF))
VC-245 board
IC2101 (RGB driver (LCD))
PD-126 board
PD-126 board
SE3450/3451 (PITCH/YAW sensor)
CF-75 board
Mechanism deck M902 (Capstan motor)
Mechanism deck M901 (Drum assy) Note1
(FK-30350)
Touch panel
LCD block
Parts replacement
Control switch board
ND901 (Fluorescent tube (LCD))
Inverter unit (LCD)
LCD block
LCD901 (LCD panel (LCD))
LCD block
Initialization of B page data *1
LCD block
Initialization of C, D, 8 page data
of B, C, D, E,
Color EVF block LED902 (Back light LED (EVF))
Initialization
Mechanism deck Note1
Adjustment
Lens device
Adjustment
Section
Color EVF block LCD902 (LCD panel (EVF))
Block replacement
F, 7, 8 page data Initialization of E, F, 7 page data
z
36MHz origin oscillation adj.
Camera
HALL adj.
z
Flange back adj.
z
z
Optical axis adj.
z
z
z
z
z
MAX GAIN adj.
z
z
AWB & LV standard data input
z
z
Auto white balance adj.
z
z
z
z
Steady shot check
z
VCO adj.
z
Bright adj.
Contrast adj.
z z
White balance adj.
Bright adj.
z
Black limit adj.
z
Contrast adj.
z
Servo, RF
Video
V-COM adj.
z
z
White balance adj.
z z z
z
z
z
z
Serial No. input
z
Touch panel adj.
CAP FG duty adj.
z
PLL fo & LPF fo adj.
z
z
z
Switching position adj.
z
z
AGC center level adj.
z
z
APC & AEQ adj.
z
z
z
z z
z z
z z
Chroma BPF fo adj.
z
S VIDEO OUT Y level adj.
z z
z z
S VIDEO OUT Cr, Cb level adj.
Mechanism
z
z
z
Center level adj.
System control
z
z
VCO adj.
LCD
z z
Color reproduction adj.
Mechanical shutter adj.
Color EVF
z
z
Zoom key center adj.
Tape path adj.
z
z z
Table. 5-1-1(1).
5-2
• Adjusting items when replacing a board or EEPROM
When replacing a board or EEPROM, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.
*1: DCR-PC5/PC5E model only
Initialization of C, D, 8 page data
z
of B, C, D, E,
Initialization of B page data *1
z
Color EVF
LCD
System control
Servo, RF
Video
Mechanism
z
z
z
z
36MHz origin oscillation adj.
z
z
Zoom key center adj.
z
z
HALL adj.
z
z
Flange back adj.
z
z
Optical axis adj.
z
z
Color reproduction adj.
z
z
MAX GAIN adj.
z
z
AWB & LV standard data input
z
z
Auto white balance adj.
z
z
Mechanical shutter adj.
z
z
Steady shot check
z z
z
VCO adj.
z
z
Bright adj.
z
z
Contrast adj.
z
z
White balance adj.
z
VCO adj.
z
z
z
Bright adj.
z
z
z
Black limit adj.
z
z
z
Contrast adj.
z
z
z
Center level adj.
z
z
z
V-COM adj.
z
z
z
White balance adj.
z
z
Serial No. input
z
z
Touch panel adj.
z
z
CAP FG duty adj.
z
z
PLL fo & LPF fo adj.
z
z
Switching position adj.
z
z
AGC center level adj.
z
z
APC & AEQ adj.
z
z
Chroma BPF fo adj.
z
z
S VIDEO OUT Y level adj.
z
z
S VIDEO OUT Cr, Cb level adj.
z
z
F, 7, 8 page data Initialization of E, F, 7 page data
Camera
IC502 (EEPROM)
Initialization
IC1407 (Flash memory) *1
VC-245 board
Adjustment
VC-245 board
(COMPLETE)
IC801 (EEPROM)
PD-126 board
Adjustment
Section
VC-245 board
(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
VC-245 board
CF-75 board
Board
replacement
z
z
Tape path adj.
Table. 5-1-1(2).
5-3
5-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT
1-1.
PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT (CAMERA SECTION)
1-1-1. List of Service Tools
• Oscilloscope
• Regulated power supply
Ref. No.
• Color monitor
• Digital voltmeter
Name
• Vectorscope
Parts Code
Usage
ND filter 1.0
Auto white balance adjustment/check
White balance adjustment/check
J-6080-808-A White balance check
J-2
ND filter 0.4
ND filter 0.1
J-6080-806-A White balance check
J-6080-807-A White balance check
J-3
J-4
Pattern box PTB-450
Color chart for pattern box
J-6082-200-A
J-6020-250-A
J-1
Filter for color temperature correction (C14)
J-6080-058-A
J-6
Adjustment remote commander (RM-95 upgraded).
J-6082-053-B
(Note 1)
Siemens star chart
J-6080-875-A For checking the flange back
J-7
Clear chart for pattern box
J-6080-621-A
J-8
CPC-6 flexible jig (Note 2)
J-6082-370-B
J-9
CPC-6 terminal board jig
J-6082-371-A
J-10
Mini pattern box
For adjusting the video section
For adjusting the color viewfinder
J-6082-353-B For adjusting the flange back
J-11
Camera table
J-6082-384-A For adjusting the flange back
J-5
Note 1: If the micro processor IC in the adjustment remote commander is
not the new micro processor (UPD7503G-C56-12), the pages
cannot be switched. In this case, replace with the new micro
processor (8-759-148-35).
For adjusting the video section
For adjusting the color viewfinder
Note 2: When using the old CPC-6 flexible jig (J-6082-370-A), open the
cabinet (R) assembly.
J-1
J-2
J-3
J-4
J-5
J-6
J-7
J-8
J-9
J-10
J-11
Fig. 5-1-1.
5-4
1-1-2.
Preparations
Note 1: For details of how remove the cabinet and boards, refer to “2.
DISASSEMBLY”.
Note 2: When performing only the adjustments, the lens block and boards
need not be disassembled.
1)
Pattern box
Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 5-1-2.
Note 3: As removing the control switch block (FK-30350)(removing the
VC-245 board CN002) means removing the lithium 3V power
supply (BT4001), data such as date, time, user-set menus will be
lost. After completing adjustments, reset these data. If the cabinet
(R) has been removed, the self-diagnosis data, data on history of
use (total drum rotation time etc. ) will be lost. Before removing,
note down the self-diagnosis data (data of page:2, address: B0 to
C6) and the data on history use (data of page: 2, address: A2 to
AA). (Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION” for the selfdiagnosis data, and to “5-4.Service Mode” for the data on the
history use.)
1.5 m
Front of the lens
Note 4: Setting the “Forced Camera Power ON” Mode
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE
button of the adjustment remote commander.
The above procedure will enable the camera power to be turned
on with the control switch block (FK-30350) removed. After
completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Camera Power
ON Mode”.
Fig. 5-1-2.
Note 5: Exiting the “Forced Camera Power ON” Mode
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE
button of the adjustment remote commander.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
5-5
Cabinet (R)
Must be connected when
performing the LCD system
adjustments.
PO-5 board
CPC-6 terminal board jig
(J-6082-371-A)
Lens block
CN3351
View finder
CF-75
board
CN3353
CN002
CN3354
NS-12
board
CN009
CN001
CN004
CPC-6 flexible jig
(J-6082-370-B)
CN005
Adjustment remote
commander
VC-245 board
CN006
CN003
Must be connected when performing
the video or EVF system adjustments.
Must be connected.
J310
AUDIO/VIDEO
jack
LANC jack
J3101
CN3103
Battery terminal
J3102
CN3102
BJ-1 board
CN3104
VIDEO
(Yellow)
Terminated at 75Ω
AUDIO Left
(White)
AUDIO Right
(Red)
Color monitor
Vector scope
AC power adaptor
AC-VF10 or
AC-VQ11
Fig. 5-1-3.
5-6
1-1-3. Precaution
1. Setting the Switch
Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and perform adjustments without loading cassette.
1.
2.
3.
POWER (Control switch block) ............................ CAMERA
NIGHT SHOT (Lens block) ............................................ OFF
FUNCTION settings of the touch panel
DIGITAL EFFECT ..................................................... OFF
EXPOSURE ................................................................ OFF
MANUAL SET of the MENU settings
PROGRAM AE ................................................ AUTO
PICTURE EFFECT .............................................. OFF
WHITE BALANCE .......................................... AUTO
CAMERA SET of the MENU settings
DIGITAL ZOOM .................................................. OFF
16:9 WIDE ............................................................ OFF
STEADY SHOT ................................................... OFF
SETUP MENU of the MENU settings
DEMO MODE ...................................................... OFF
FOCUS (FK-30350 block) .......................................... Manual
BACK LIGHT (FK-30350 block) .................................... OFF
4.
5.
2. Order of Adjustments
Basically carry out adjustments in the order given.
Electronic beam scanning frame
H
C
A B
A=B
C=D
D
CRT picture frame
Y
ello
an
Green
White
w
Magenta
Cy
Red
Blue
Y
ello
an
Green
White
Magenta
w
Red
Cy
Blue
Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame )
V
B A
Fig. b (TV monitor picture)
Enlargement
Fig. a
(Video output terminal
output waveform)
Difference in level
B
Adjust the camera zoom and direction to
obtain the output waveform shown in Fig. a
and the TV monitor display shown in Fig. b.
A
Fig.5-1-4.
3. Subjects
1) Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame)
When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, adjust
the picture frame as shown in Fig. 5-1-4. (Color reproduction
adjustment frame)
2) Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame)
Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a
clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations during
this time.)
3) Flange back adjustment chart
Make the chart shown in Fig. 5-1-5 using A0 size (1189mm ×
841mm) black and white vellum paper.
White
841mm
Black
1189mm
Fig. 5-1-5.
Note: Use matte vellum paper bigger than A0, and make sure the edges of
the black and white paper joined together are not rough.
5-7
1-2.
INITIALIZATION OF B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 PAGE
DATA
1-2-1.
Processing after Completing Modification of C, D, 8 Page data
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
2
INITIALIZATION OF C, D, 8 PAGE DATA
2
2
00
01
1. Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data
Note:
Note1: If “Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data” is performed, all data of the
C page, D page and 8 page will be initialized. (It is impossible to
initialize a single page.)
Note2: If the C, D, 8 page data has been initialized, the following
adjustments need to be performed again.
1) Modification of C, D, 8 page data
2) Serial No. input
3) Servo and RF system adjustments
4) Video system adjustments
5) Color viewfinder system adjustments
6) LCD system Adjustments
29
29
Set the data
Set the data, and press the
PAUSE button.
If the following symptoms occur after completing of the
“Modification of C, D, 8 page data”, check that the data of the
“Fixed data-2” addresses of D page are same as those of the same
model of the same destination.
1) The battery end mark on the LCD or viewfinder screen is
flashing.
2) The power is shut off so that unit cannot operate.
3. C Page Table
Adjusting page
C
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the C, D, 8
Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of C, D, 8
Page Data”.)
Adjusting Address
Adjusting page
10 to FF
D
Address
Adjusting Address
Adjusting page
10 to FF
8
Adjusting Address
00 to FF
Initializing Method:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
2
0
3
01
81
01
Set the data
Check that the data is “00”.
3
3
80
0A
Set the data, and press the
PAUSE button.
4
3
80
5
00 to 0F
10
11
12
13
14 to 15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23 to 24
25
26
27
28
29
2A to 2B
2C
2D to 3F
40
41
42
43 to 48
49
4A
4B to 4C
4D
4E to 4F
50
51
Check that the data changes to
“1A”
Perform “Modification of C, D,
8 Page Data”.
2. Modification of C, D, 8 Page Data
If the C, D, 8 page data has been initialized, change the data of the
“Fixed data-2” address shown in the following tables by manual
input.
Modifying Method:
1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set
data: 01.
2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because
they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy
the data built in the same model.
Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may
not operate.
3)
4)
When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the
adjustment remote commander each time when setting new
data to write the data in the non-volatile memory.
Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value.
If not, change the data to the initial value.
5-8
Initial value
EE
00
00
00
E0
2A
2A
32
32
25
3E
3E
D5
99
88
E3
A1
04
20
03
Remark
Switching position adj.
Fixed data-1
Cap FG duty adj.
Fixed data-2
AEQ adj.
Fixed data-1
AEQ adj.
Fixed data-1
AGC center level adj.
PLL fo adj.
APC adj.
LPF fo adj.
Fixed data-1
S VIDEO out Y level adj.
S VIDEO out Cr level adj.
S VIDEO out Cb level adj.
Chroma BPF fo adj.
PLL fo fine adj.
Fixed data-1
APC adj.
Fixed data-1(Initialized data)
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1(Initialized data)
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Address
52 to 63
64
65 to 85
86
87
88
89
8A to 9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
A0
A1 to A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9 to AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB to C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8 to CB
CC
CD to D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
Initial value
Remark
Address
DE to E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
F0 to F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Initial value
08
00
46
01
01
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
Remark
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Serial No. input
Fixed data-1
Emergency memory address
Table. 5-1-2.
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
5-9
4. D Page Table
Address Initial value
NTSC PAL
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E to 60
61
62 to 63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B to 8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
3B 58 [4B]
93
58 3B [20]
94
95
8F
8F
96
97
80
80
98
80
80
99
38
38
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
A0
A1
A2
5C
7E
A3
7E
5C
A4
A2
A2
A5
B0
B0
A6
08
08
A7
A8
90
90
A9
6F
6F
AA
2D
2D
AB
2D
2D
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the C, D, 8
Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of C, D, 8
Page Data”.)
Address Initial value
NTSC PAL
00 to 0F
10
00
00
11 to 12
13
14
15 to 19
1A
1B to 1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31 to 32
33
34 to 41
42
43
44
45
46 to 47
48
49
4A to 4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
Remark
Test mode
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
Fixed data-1
5-10
Remark
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
VCO adj. (EVF)
[ ] : DCR-PC4E
Fixed data-2
Bright adj.(EVF)
Fixed data-2
White balance adj. (EVF)
Contrast adj. (EVF)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
VCO adj. (LCD)
V-COM adj. (LCD)
Bright adj. (LCD)
Black limit adj. (LCD)
Fixed data-2
White balance adj. (LCD)
Contrast adj. (LCD)
Center level adj. (LCD)
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
Fixed data-1
5. 8 Page Table
Address Initial value
NTSC PAL
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB to C1
C2
C3 to C5
C6
C7
C8
C9 to CB
CC
CD to D0
D1
D2 to D5
D6
D7
D8 to D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE to DF
E0
D0
D0
E1
26
26
E2
CE
CE
E3
1E
1E
E4 to FF
Remark
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the C, D, 8
Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of C, D, 8
Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Address
Remark
00 to 52
53
54 to 59
5A
5B
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in the same
model.)
5C to 98 Fixed data-1
99
Fixed data-2
9A to A7 Fixed data-1
A8
Fixed data-2
A9 to FF Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Table. 5-1-4.
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Touch panel adj.
Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-3.
5-11
1-2-2.
INITIALIZATION OF B PAGE DATA
(DCR-PC5/PC5E)
Processing after Completing Modification of B Page data:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
Note: When reading the B page data, insert a “Memory Stick” into the
“Memory Stick” slot.
1
2
Switch setting:
POWER ................................................................. MEMORY
Note: If the B page data has been initialized, the following adjustments
need to be performed again.
1) Modification of B page data
B
Adjusting Address
00 to FF
Initializing Method:
Order Page Address Data
00 to 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A to 4F
50
51 to 53
54
55 to 6F
70
71 to FF
Procedure
0
2
01
8F
01
02
Set the data.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3
2
8F
03
4
2
8F
02
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
5
2
8F
00
6
5
0E
00
7
5
01
F3
8
5
00
01
9
5
0E
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data changes to
“01”.
2. Modification of B Page Data
If the B page data has been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed
data-2” address shown in the following tables by manual input.
1
2
8F
02
2
2
8F
03
3
2
8F
02
4
2
8F
00
Procedure
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Modifying Method:
1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set
data: 01.
2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because
they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy
the data built in the same model.
Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may
not operate.
3)
Set the data.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Remark
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in the same
model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-5.
Perform “Modification of B
Page Data”.
Preparations:
Order Page Address Data
29
29
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the B Page
Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B Page
Data”.)
Address
1
2
10
00
01
3. B Page Table
1. Initializing the B Page Data
Adjusting page
2
2
When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the
adjustment remote commander each time when setting new
data to write the data in the non-volatile memory.
5-12
1-2-3.
3. F Page Table
INITIALIZATION OF E, F, 7 PAGE DATA
Note1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F, 7
Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, 7
Page Data”.)
1. Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data
Note1: If “Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data” is performed, all data of the
E page, F page and 7 page will be initialized. (It is impossible to
initialize a single page.)
Note2: If the E, F, 7 page data has been initialized, following adjustments
need to be performed again.
1) Modification of E, F, 7 page data
2) Camera system adjustments
3) IR transmitter adjustments
Adjusting page
F
Adjusting Address
Adjusting page
10 to FF
E
Adjusting Address
Adjusting page
00 to FF
7
Adjusting Address
00 to 59
Address Initial value
NTSC PAL
00 to 0F
10 to 11
12
80
80
13
80
80
14 to 16
17
81
81
18
A0
A0
19
17
17
1A to 1C
1D
9A
9A
1E
80
80
1F
7A
7A
20 to 30
30
90
90
31
3E
3E
32
43
43
33
59
59
34
35
22
22
36
37
27
24
38 to 3B
3C
00
00
3D
F1
EF
3E to 3F
40
80
80
41
40
40
42 to 49
4A
51
51
4B
19
19
4C
22
22
4D
20
20
4E
93
93
4F
13
13
50
00
00
51
00
00
52 to 59
5A
46
46
5B
00
00
5C
19
19
5D
00
00
5E
2A
2A
5F
00
00
60 to 65
66
67
68
69
00
00
6A to 6F
70
C4
C4
Switch setting:
POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
Initializing Method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
0
6
01
01
3
6
03
4
6
02
5
01
01
Procedure
Set the data.
Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
2D: DCR-PC5 (NTSC)
2F: DCR-PC4E/PC5E (PAL)
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data changes to
“01”.
Perform “Modification of E, F, 7
Page Data”.
2. Modification of E, F, 7 Page Data
If the E, F, 7 page data has been initialized, change the data of the
“Fixed data-2” address shown in the following table by manual input.
Modifying Method:
1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set
data: 01.
2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because
they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy
the data built in the same model.
Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may
not operate.
3)
4)
When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the
adjustment remote commander each time when setting new
data to write the data in the non-volatile memory.
Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value.
If not, change the data to the initial value.
Processing after Completing Modification of E, F, 7 Page data
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
2) Turn off the power and turn on again.
5-13
Remark
Fixed data-1
36MHz origin osc adj.
Zoom key center adj.
Fixed data-1
HALL adj.
Fixed data-1
Max gain adj.
AWB & LV standard data input
Fixed data-1
AWB & LV standard data input
Fixed data-1
Color reproduction adj.
Fixed data-1
Color reproduction adj.
Fixed data-1
Color reproduction adj.
Fixed data-1
Auto white balance adj.
Fixed data-1
Flange back adj.
Fixed data-1
Flange back adj.
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Optical axis adj.
Fixed data-1
Mechanical shutter adj.
4. E Page Table
Address Initial value
NTSC PAL
71
0E
0E
72
75
75
73
0C
0C
74
26
26
75
0B
0B
76
35
35
77
0A
0A
78
6E
6E
79
09
09
7A
A5
A5
7B
61
61
7C
A1
A1
7D
79
79
7E
64
64
7F
81
81
80
82
82
81
84
84
82
B5
B5
83
7B
7B
84
20
20
85 to 8D
8E
8F
90 to 9E
9F
A0 to AF
B0
B1
B2 to B3
B4
B5 to D0
D1
D2 to D4
D5
D6 to DC
DD
DE to FF
Remark
Note1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F, 7
Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, 7
Page Data”.)
Mechanical shutter adj.
Address Initial value
NTSC PAL
00 to 64
65
66 to 69
6A
6B to 71
72
73
74 to 7E
7F
80 to 83
84
85
86
87
88 to 8B
8C
8D to 8E
8F
90
91
92 to 94
95
96 to 97
98
99 to AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8 to CE
CF
D0
26
24
D1 to DD
DE
5F
71
DF to FF
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-6.
Remark
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Optical axis adj.
Fixed data-1
Optical axis adj.
Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-7.
5-14
5. 7 Page Table
Note1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F, 7
Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, 7
Page Data”.)
Address Initial value
NTSC PAL
00 to 1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21 to 22
23
24
25
26
27 to 3C
3D
3E to 51
52
53
54 to 59
7C
7F
7C
7B
7C
7F
7C
7B
Remark
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in
the same model.)
Fixed data-1
(Initialized data)
Mechanical shutter adj.
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-8.
5-15
1-3.
CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the
specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” are
satisfied.
Note: NTSC model: DCR-PC5
PAL model: DCR-PC4E/PC5E
2. Zoom Key Center Adjustment
1. 36MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment
(VC-245 board)
Set the frequency of the clock for synchronization.
If deviated, the synchronization will be disrupted and the color will
become inconsistent.
Subject
Not required
Set the A/D value center of the microprocessor to the center voltage
of the zoom key.
If deviated, the zoom lens operates of itself ,even if the zoom key is
the center position.
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Pin qs of IC702
Frequency counter
Subject
Measurement Point
Not required
Display data of page: 6, address: 50
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
F
12
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Adjustment remote commander
F
Specified Value
Pin qs of IC702:
f=18000000 ± 90Hz
Adjustment Address
13
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
0
F
01
12
3
4
F
0
12
01
01
00
24
Note: Don’t touch the zoom lever during adjustment.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
Set the data.
Change the data and set the
frequency (f) to the specified
value.
Press PAUSE button.
Set the data.
13
12
25
36
1
37
48
IC702
VC-245 board (SIDE B)
Fig. 5-1-6.
5-16
Procedure
1
2
0
6
01
50
01
Set the data.
Read the data, and this data is
named D50.
3
F
13
D50
4
0
01
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data.
3. HALL Adjustment
For detecting the position of the lens iris, adjust AMP gain and
offset.
Subject
Not required
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Display data of page 1 (Note1)
Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
F
17, 18, 19
Specified Value 1
Specified Value 2
15 to 19
88 to 8C
Note1: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander.
1 : XX : XX
IRIS display data
Switch setting:
POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
0
01
01 Set the data.
2
3
6
6
94
95
17
8A
Set the data.
Set the data.
4
6
01
6D
5
6
02
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data changes to
“01”. (Note2)
6
6
01
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
17, 18, 19.
Checking method:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
6
04
03 Set the data.
2
6
3
1
4
6
5
1
01
01
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the IRIS display data
(Note1) satisfies the specified
value 1.
01
03
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the IRIS display data
(Note1) satisfies the specified
value.2.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
6
94
00 Set the data.
2
3
6
6
95
01
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4
5
6
0
04
01
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
5-17
4. Flange Back Adjustment
(Using Minipattern Box)
The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out
automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during
auto focusing/manual focusing.
Subject
Siemens star chart with ND filter for
the minipattern box (Note1)
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Display data of page: F, address: 5F
Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
F
13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F
Specified Value
Upper digit: 0 to B
Lower digit: 0 to 9
Note1: Dark Siemens star chart.
Note2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Preparations:
1) The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following
figure.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
0
01
01 Set the data.
Note: The attachment lenses are not used.
Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and
the front of the lens of the camcorder is less than 3cm.
Make the height of the minipattern box and the camcorder equal.
Check that the output voltage of the regulated power supply is
the specified voltage.
Check that at both the zoom lens TELE end and WIDE end,
the center of the Siemens star chart and center of the exposure
screen coincide.
2
6
01
13
3
6
01
27
4
6
02
5
F
5F
Specified voltage: The specified voltage varies according to the
minipattern box, so adjust the power supply
output voltage to the specified voltage written
on the sheet which is supplied with the
minipattern box.
6
F
5F
2)
3)
4)
5)
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. (Note3)
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data changes to
“01”. (Note4)
Check that the upper digit of the
data is “0” to “B”.
Check that the lower digit of the
data is “0” to “9”.
Note3: Don’t touch the zoom lever. If you touch the zoom lever, the zoom
center adjustment data will be rewritten in the value which isn’t
correct.
Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F.
Below 3 cm
Minipattern box
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
Camcorder
Camera
table
Regulated power supply
Output voltage : Specified voltage ±0.01Vdc
Output current : more than 3.5A
6
01
00
2
0
01
00
3
Red (+)
Black (–)
Yellow (SENS +)
White (SENS –)
1
Need not connected
Black (GND)
Fig. 5-1-7.
5-18
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data.
Perform “Flange Back Check”.
5. Flange Back Adjustment
(Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart and Subject
More Than 500m Away)
The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out
automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during
auto focusing/manual focusing.
5-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2)
Perform this adjustment after performing “Flange Back Adjustment
(1)”.
Subject
Subject more than 500m away
(Subjects with clear contrast such as
buildings, etc.)
5-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1)
Subject
Flange back adjustment chart
(2.0 m from the front of the protection
glass)
(Luminance: 350 ± 30 lux)
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Display data of page: F, address: 5F
Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
F
13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F
Specified Value
Upper digit: 0 to B
Lower digit: 0 to 9
3
0
6
6
01
01
01
4
6
02
5
F
5F
6
F
5F
01
13
15
Procedure
Set the data.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. (Note2)
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
Check that the data changes to
“01”. (Note3)
Check that the upper digit is “0”
to “B”.
Check that the lower digit is “0”
to “9”.
2
01
00
0
6
01
01
3
6
01
4
6
02
01
13
29
Procedure
Set the data.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. (Note2)
Place a ND filter on the lens so
that the optimum image is
obtain.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data changes to
“01”. (Note3)
Note2: Don’t touch the zoom lever. If you touch the zoom lever, the zoom
center adjustment data will be rewritten in the value which isn’t
correct.
Note3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
6
F
13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F
Preparations:
1) Set the zoom lens to the TELE end and expose a subject that is
more than 500m away (subject with clear contrast such as
building, etc.). (Nearby subjects less than 500m away should
not be in the screen.)
Note2: Don’t touch the zoom lever. If you touch the zoom lever, the zoom
center adjustment data will be rewritten in the value which isn’t
correct.
Note3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F.
1
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
1
2
Check operation on TV monitor
Note1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Note1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Perform “Flange Back
Adjustment (2)”
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
6
01
00
2
0
01
00
3
5-19
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data.
Perform “Flange Back Check”.
6. Flange Back Check
Subject
Siemens star
(2.0m from the front of the lens)
(Luminance : approx. 200 lux)
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Check operation on TV monitor
Specified Value
Focused at the TELE end and WIDE
end.
Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF
4) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF
Note: When the auto focus is ON, the lens can be checked if it is focused
or not by observing the data on the page 1 of the adjustment remote
commander.
1) Select page: 6, address: 04, and set data: 0F.
2) Page 1 shows the state of the focus.
1 : 00 : XX
Focused
[ Odd:
Even: Unfocused
Checking method:
1) Place the Siemens star 2.0m from the front of the lens.
2) To open the IRIS, decrease the luminous intensity to the
Siemens star up to a point before noise appear on the image.
3) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end.
4) Turn on the auto focus.
5) Check that the lens is focused (Note).
6) Select page: 6, address: 21, and set data: 10.
7) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end.
8) Observe the TV monitor and check that the lens is focused.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
1) Select page: 6, address: 21, and set data: 00.
2) Select page: 6, address: 04, and set data: 00.
5-20
7. Optical Axis Adjustment
Align the lens Optical Axis with that of the CCD imager. If deviated,
center of picture can lose focus when zoom is operated from the
WIDE end to the TELE end.
Subject
Siemens star
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Check on the monitor TV
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
F
69
Note: NTSC model: DCR-PC5
PAL model: DCR-PC4E/PC5E
Area
E
D0, DE
1
2
Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
3
Preparations before adjustments:
1) Playback the monoscope segment of the system check tape
(XH5-5 (NTSC), XH5-5P (PAL)).
2) Attach the optical axis frame chart (transparent) on the monitor
TV screen. Center of monoscope image and that that of optical
axis frame must be agree.
3) Set to the camera mode.
4
5
6
7
Adjusting method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: 6, address: 40, and set data: 02.
3) Select page: 6, address: 41, and set data: 01.
4) Input the data of Table 5-1-9 to each adjustment addresses.
8
00
22.6° to
67.5°
67.6° to
112.5°
112.6° to
157.5°
157.6° to
202.5°
202.6° to
247.5°
247.6° to
292.5°
292.6° to
337.5°
337.6° to
22.5°
Connection data
Page: F
Page: E
Address: 69 Address: D0 Address: DE
NTSC PAL NTSC PAL
01
22
26
57
69
02
22
26
5F
71
03
22
26
67
79
04
02
26
69
7D
05
22
26
67
79
06
22
26
5F
71
07
22
26
57
69
08
02
26
55
65
Table. 5-1-10.
Note: Press the PAUSE button each time to set the data.
Page: F
Address: 69
Display
phase
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
2) Select page: 6, address: 40, and set data: 00.
3) Select page: 6, address: 41, and set data: 00.
Page: E
Address: D0
Address: DE
NTSC
PAL
NTSC
PAL
22
26
5F
71
Table. 5-1-9.
5)
6)
7)
Place the Siemens star 2.0 m away from the front of the lens.
Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end.
Point the lens toward the Siemens star chart until center of the
Siemens star is located in the center of the optical axis frame.
8) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end.
9) Measure on the monitor TV screen in which area of the optical
axis frame the center of the Siemens star is located. Measure
the amount of displacement (distance between the center of
the Siemens star and the center of the optical axis frame.) The
measurement value is named L1.
10) Read the correction data corresponding to the area from Table
5-1-10.
11) Input the correction data to each adjustment address.
Note: Press the PAUSE button each time to set the data.
12) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end.
13) Point the lens toward the Siemens star chart until center of the
Siemens star is located in the center of the optical axis frame.
14) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end.
15) Measure the amount of displacement (distance between the
center of the Siemens star and the center of the optical axis
frame.) The measurement value is named L2.
16) Compare the values L1 and L2, and confirm that L2 is smaller
than L1. If L2 is lager than L1, input the data of Table 5-1-9 to
each adjustment address.
Fig. 5-1-8.
Note: Press the PAUSE button each time to set the data.
5-21
8. Picture Frame Setting
Subject
Color bar chart
(Color reproduction adjustment
frame)
(1.5m from the front of the lens)
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Video output terminal
Oscilloscope and TV monitor
Specified Value
A=B, C=D, E=F
Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF
4) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF
Setting method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: F, address: 69, after noting down the data, set data:
00, and press the PAUSE button.
3) Adjust the zoom and the camera direction, and set to the
specified position.
4) Mark the position of the picture frame on the monitor display,
and adjust the picture frame to this position in following
adjustments using “Color reproduction adjustment frame”.
Check on the oscilloscope
1. Horizontal period
A=B
C=D
B
C
A
D
Processing after Completing Camera System Adjustments:
After completing the camera system adjustments, release the data
settings.
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: F, address: 69, set the data noted down at step 2),
and press the PAUSE button.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Fig. 5-1-9.
2. Vertical period
E=F
E
F
V
Fig. 5-1-10.
Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode)
Color bar chart picture frame
Fig. 5-1-11.
5-22
Monitor TV picture frame
9. Color Reproduction Adjustment
Adjust the color Separation matrix coefficient so that proper color
reproduction is produced.
Subject
Color bar chart
(Color reproduction adjustment
frame)
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Video output terminal
Vectorscope
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
F
35, 37, 3C, 3D
Specified Value
All color luminance points should
settle within each color reproduction
frame.
For NTSC model
Note: NTSC model: DCR-PC5
PAL model: DCR-PC4E/PC5E
Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF
4) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF
Adjusting method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: F, address: 8E, set data: 29, and press the PAUSE
button.
3) Select page: F, address: C0, set the following data and press
the PAUSE button.
37: NTSC model
B7: PAL model
4) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 3D, and press the PAUSE
button.
5) Adjust the GAIN and PHASE of the vectorscope, and adjust
the burst luminance point to the burst position of the color
reproduction frame.
6) Change the data of page: F, address: 35, 37, 3C and 3D, and
settle each color luminance point in each color reproduction
frame.
Burst position
For PAL model
Burst position
Note: Be sure to press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote
commander before changing the addresses. If not, the new data
will not be written to the memory.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
1) Select page: F, address: 8E, set data: 2E, and press the PAUSE
button.
2) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE
button.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Fig. 5-1-12.
5-23
10. MAX GAIN Adjustment
Setting the minimum illumination.
If it is not consistent, the image level required for taking subjects in
low illuminance will not be produced (dark).
Subject
Clear chart
(Color reproduction adjustment
frame)
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
11. Auto White Balance & LV Standard Data Input
Adjust the white balance reference at 3200K, and adjust the normal
coefficient of the light value.
Subject
Clear chart
(Color reproduction adjustment
frame)
F
1D
Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
0
01
01 Set the data.
6
6
96
97
00
27
Set the data.
Set the data.
4
6
01
6F
5
6
02
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data changes to
“01”. (Note)
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
6
96
00 Set the data.
2
6
97
00 Set the data.
01
00
4
0
01
00
F
1E, 1F, 30 to 33
Specified Value
0FF0 to 1010
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
Processing after Completing Adjustments
6
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Note: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
1D
3
Display data of page 1 (Note4)
Adjustment remote commander
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “ Color
reproduction Adjustment”.
Note2: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only
once.
Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Note4: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander.
1 : XX : XX
LV data
Adjusting method:
2
3
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data.
1
2
0
6
01
01
01
11
3
6
01
0D
4
6
02
5
F
10
6
1
2E
Procedure
Set the data.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data changes to
“01”. (Note5)
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the display data
(Note4) satisfies the specified
value.
Note5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
1E, 1F, 30 to 33.
Processing after Completing Adjustments
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
5-24
1
6
01
00
2
F
10
00
3
4
0
01
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data.
Perform “Auto White Balance
Adjustment”.
12. Auto White Balance Adjustment
Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data.
If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility will
be poor.
Subject
Clear chart
(Color reproduction adjustment
frame)
Filter
Measurement Point
Filter C14 for color temperature
correction
Display data of page 1 (Note3)
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Adjustment remote commander
F
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
40, 41
DCR-PC5(NTSC):
R ratio: 2B00 to 2C00
B ratio: 5B00 to 5C00
DCR-PC4E/PC5E (PAL):
R ratio: 2D00 to 2E00
B ratio: 5B00 to 5C00
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
Note1: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only
once.
Note2: Perform “Auto White Balance & LV Standard Data Input” before
this adjustment.
Note3: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander.
1 : XX : XX
Display data
Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF
2
0
01
3
4
F
F
42
42
5
6
F
F
43
43
7
8
F
F
9
10
01
Procedure
Place the C14 filter for color
temperature correction on the
lens.
Set the data.
Write down the data.
Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
2B: DCR-PC5 (NTSC)
2D: DCR-PC4E/PC5E (PAL)
80
Write down the data.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
44
44
5B
Write down the data.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
F
F
45
45
80
Write down the data.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
11
6
01
83
12
6
01
81
13
6
02
14
6
01
3F
15
6
04
04
Check that the data changes to
“01”. (Note4)
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data.
16
1
17
6
05
Check that the display data
(Note3) satisfies the R ratio
specified value.
Set the data.
18
1
04
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the display data
(Note3) satisfies the B ratio
specified value.
Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
40, 41.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
5-25
6
01
00
2
6
04
00
3
F
42
4
F
43
5
F
44
6
F
45
7
0
01
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data.
Set the data that is written down
at step 3, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data that is written down
at step 5, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data that is written down
at step 7, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data that is written down
at step 9, and press PAUSE
button.
00
Set the data.
13. White Balance Check
Subject
Clear chart
(Color reproduction adjustment
frame)
Filter
Measurement Point
Filter C14 for color temperature
correction
ND filter 1.0 and 0.4 and 0.1
Video output terminal
Measuring Instrument
Specified Value
Vectorscope
Fig. 5-1-13. A to B
Processing after Completing Adjustments
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
6
01
00
2
F
10
00
3
0
01
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data.
Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF
Checking method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
6
01
0F
3
4
6
01
3F
7
R-Y
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Place the C14 filter on the lens.
Check that the center of the
white luminance point is within
the circle shown Fig. 5-1-13. B.
6
01
00
0
F
12
1
13
F
14
1
01
10
10
01
A9
A1
2mm
B-Y
2mm
Remove the C14 filter.
Indoor white balance data check
9
10
11
Check that the lens is not
covered with either filter.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the center of the
white luminance point is within
the circle shown Fig. 5-1-13. A.
Outdoor white balance check
5
6
8
Procedure
Indoor white balance check
Fig. 5-1-13. (A)
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Place the ND filter 1.5
(1.0+0.1+0.4) on the lens.
0.5mm
R-Y
B-Y
3mm
0.5mm
Set the data.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3mm
Check that the display data
(Note) satisfies the specified
value.
Specified value: 0000 to 0BC0
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Fig. 5-1-13. (B)
Check that the second digit of
the display data (Note) is an odd
number.
Specified value:
1 : XX : XX
Odd number
Note: Displayed data of the adjustment remote commander.
1 : XX : XX
Display data
5-26
14. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment
(DCR-PC5/PC5E)
Adjust the period which the mechanical shutter is closed, and
compensate the exposure.
Adjustment Page
F
7
Adjustment Address
70 to 84
15. Steady Shot Check
Precautions on the Parts Replacement
There are two types of repair parts.
Type A: ENC03LA
Type B: ENC03LB
Replace the broken sensor with a same type sensor. If replace with
other type parts, the image will vibrate up and down or left and
right during hand-shake correction operations. After replacing,
perform the following procedure.
23 to 26
Input method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Input the following data to page: F, addresses: 70 to 84.
Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander
each time to set the data.
Address
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
80
81
82
83
84
3)
Precautions on Angular Velocity Sensor
The sensor incorporates a precision oscillator. Handle it with care
as if it dropped, the balance of the oscillator will be disrupted and
operations will not be performed properly.
Subject
Arbitrary
Data
C4
0E
75
0C
26
0B
35
0A
6E
09
A5
61
A1
79
64
81
82
84
B5
7B
20
Specified Value
1A00 to 2600
Switch setting:
1) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ...................................... ON
2) ZOOM .................................................................... TELE end
Check method:
Order Page Address Data
Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander
each time to set the data.
4)
Display data of page 1 (Note1)
Adjustment remote commander
Note1: Displayed data of the adjustment remote commander.
1 : XX : XX
Display data
Input the following data to page: 7, addresses: 23 to 26.
Address
23
24
25
26
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Data
7C
7F
7C
7B
Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
04
11
Procedure
Pitch sensor check
(CF-75 board SE3450)
Set the data.
1
6
2
1
3
4
6
1
04
12
5
0
01
01
6
F
10
E2
7
1
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Move the camcoder, and check
that the display data (Note1) is
changing.
8
F
10
E3
9
1
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Move the camcoder, and check
that the display data (Note1) is
changing.
Check that the display data
(Note1) satisfies the specified
value. (Note2)
Yaw sensor check
(CF-75 board SE3451)
Set the data.
Check that the display data
(Note1) satisfies the specified
value. (Note2)
Steady shot check
Set the data.
Note2: Don’t move the camcoder during data check.
Processing after Completing Adjustments
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
5-27
1
F
10
00
2
0
01
00
3
4
6
04
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data.
Set the data.
Move the camcoder, and check
that the steady shot operations
have been performed normally
1-4.
1. VCO Adjustment (VC-245 board)
Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the EVF screen will be
blurred.
Mode
Camera
COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER
SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
Note1: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages
caused by static electricity.
Note2: Set the switches as follows.
Viewfinder ................................... ON (Viewfinder is Pulled out.)
Note3: Perform the following data setting before the viewfinder system
adjustments.
1) Select page: 2, address: 0E, and set data: 67.
2) Select page: 2, address: 0F, and set data: 01.
Reset the data after completing adjustment.
1) Select page: 2, address: 0E, and set data: 00.
2) Select page: 2, address: 0F, and set data: 00.
Signal Name
LANC SIG
EVF VCO
TCK
TDO
SWP
GND
Pin No.
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
Arbitrary
Pin 5 of CN004 (EVF VCO)
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Frequency counter
D
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
92, 93
f = 15734 ± 30Hz (NTSC)
f = 15625 ± 30Hz (PAL)
Note1: NTSC: DCR-PC5
PAL: DCR-PC4E/PC5E
[Adjusting connector]
Most of the measuring points for adjusting the viewfinder system
are concentrated in CN004 of the VC-245 board.
Connect the Measuring Instruments via the CPC-6 flexible jig (J6082-370-B) and CPC-6 terminal board jig (J-6082-371-A).
The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN004.
Pin No.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
Subject
Measurement Point
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
0
01
01 Set the data.
2
Signal Name
EVF VG
GND
D
92
3
D
92
4
D
92
Change the data and set the
VCO frequency (f) to the
specified value.
Press PAUSE button.
Read the data, and this data is
named D92.
Convert D92 to decimal notation,
and obtain D92'. (Note2)
5
TMS
TDI
GND
RF IN/LANC JACK IN
RF MON
6
Calculate D93' using following
equations (Decimal calculation)
NTSC model:
When D92' 226
D93' = D92' + 29
When D92' > 226
D93' = 255
PAL model:
When D92' 29
D93' = D92' – 29
When D92' < 29
D93' = 00
7
Convert D93' to a hexadecimal
number, and obtain D93. (Note2)
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Table 5-1-11.
CN004
2
1
20
19
8
D
93
D93
9
0
01
00
Set the data.
Note2: Refer to “Table 5-4-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table”.
Remove the CPC lid
Screw (M1.7 × 2.5)
Fig. 5-1-14.
5-28
3. Contrast Adjustment (VC-245 board)
Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified
value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated
(whitish).
Mode
Camera
2. Bright Adjustment (VC-245 board)
Set the D range of the RGB decoder used to drive the LCD to the
specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen will become blackish
or saturated (whitish).
Mode
Camera
Subject
Measurement Point
Arbitrary
Pin 4 of CN004 (EVF VG)
Subject
Measurement Point
Arbitrary
Pin 4 of CN004 (EVF VG)
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope
D
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope
D
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
95
A = 7.60 ± 0.05V
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
99
A=2.45 ± 0.05V
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
0
01
01 Set the data.
2
D
95
3
D
95
4
0
01
00
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
0
01
01 Set the data.
Change the data and set the
voltage (A) between the reversed
waveform pedestal and nonreversed waveform pedestal to
the specified value.
Press PAUSE button.
2
D
99
3
D
99
Set the data.
4
0
01
Change the data and set the
voltage (A) between the 3 steps
peak and pedestal to the
specified value.
(The data should be “00” to “7F”.)
Press PAUSE button.
00
Set the data.
Pedestal
A
3 steps peak
A
2H
2H
Pedestal
Pedestal
Fig. 5-1-15.
Fig. 5-1-16.
5-29
4. White Balance Adjustment (VC-245 board)
Correct the white balance.
If deviated, the reproduction of the EVF screen may degenerate.
Mode
Camera
Subject
Measurement Point
Arbitrary
Check on EVF screen
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
D
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
97, 98
The EVF screen should not be
colored.
Note1: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts.
If necessary, adjust them.
1. LCD panel
2. Light induction plate
3. IC1802
Note2: Use the AC power adaptor.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
0
01
01 Set the data.
2
D
97
80
3
D
98
80
4
D
98
5
D
97
6
D
97
7
D
98
8
D
98
9
D
98
10
0
01
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the EVF screen is not
colored. If not colored, proceed
to step 10.
Change the data so that the EVF
screen is not colored.
Press PAUSE button.
Change the data so that the EVF
screen is not colored.
Press PAUSE button.
00
If the EVF screen is colored,
repeat steps 5 to 9.
Set the data.
5-30
1-5.
1. VCO Adjustment (PD-126 board)
Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will
be blurred.
Mode
VTR stop
LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
Note 1: The back light (fluorescent tube) is driven by a high voltage AC
power supply. Therefore, do not touch the back light holder to
avoid electrical shock.
Note 2: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages
caused by static electricity.
[Adjusting connector]
Most of the measuring points for adjusting the LCD system are
concentrated in CN2105 of the PD-126 board. The following table
shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN2105.
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
Signal Name
VG
COM
GND
PSIG
HSY
Signal
Measurement Point
No signal
Pin 5 of CN2105 (HSY)
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Frequency counter
D
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
A2, A3
f = 15734 ± 30Hz (NTSC)
f = 15625 ± 30Hz (PAL)
Note1: NTSC: DCR-PC5
PAL: DCR-PC4E/PC5E
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
0
01
01 Set the data.
Table 5-1-12.
CN2105
5
1
2
D
A2
3
D
A2
4
D
A2
Change the data and set the
VCO frequency (f) to the
specified value.
Press PAUSE button.
Read the data, and this data is
named DA2.
Convert DA2 to decimal notation,
and obtain DA2'. (Note2)
5
PD-126 board
6
Calculate DA3' using following
equations (Decimal calculation)
NTSC model:
When DA2' 221
DA3' = DA2' + 34
When DA2' > 221
DA3' = 255
PAL model:
When DA2' 34
DA3' = DA2' – 34
When DA2' < 34
DA3' = 00
7
Convert DA3' to a hexadecimal
number, and obtain DA3. (Note2)
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Fig. 5-1-17.
8
D
A3
DA3
9
0
01
00
Set the data.
Note2: Refer to “Table 5-4-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table”.
5-31
2. Bright Adjustment (PD-126 board)
Set the D range of the RGB decoder used to drive the LCD to the
specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen will become blackish
or saturated (whitish).
Mode
VTR stop
3. Black Limit Adjustment (PD-126 board)
Set the dynamic range of the LCD driver to an appropriate level. If
deviated, the LCD screen will become blackish or saturated
(whitish).
Mode
VTR stop
Signal
Measurement Point
No signal
Pin 1 of CN2105 (VG)
Signal
Measurement Point
No signal
Pin 4 of CN2105 (PSIG)
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope
D
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope
D
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
A5
A = 7.8 ± 0.05V
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
A6
A = 8.60 ± 0.05V
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
0
01
01 Set the data.
2
D
A5
3
D
A5
4
5
0
01
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
0
01
01 Set the data.
Change the data and set the
voltage (A) between the reversed
waveform pedestal and nonreversed waveform pedestal to
the specified value.
Press PAUSE button.
00
2
3
2
2
0E
0F
61
4
D
A6
5
D
A6
6
7
2
2
0E
0F
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
8
9
0
01
00
Set the data.
Check that the spacified value of
“Bright Adjustment” is satisfied.
If not, perform “Bright
Adjustment”.
Change the data and set the
PSIG signal amplitude (A) to the
specified value.
(The data should be “00” to
“0F”.)
Press PAUSE button.
Set the data.
Perform “Black Limit
Adjustment”.
Pedestal
Set the data.
Set the following data.
5B: DCR-PC5 (NTSC)
53: DCR-PC4E/PC5E (PAL)
A
A
V
2H
Pedestal
Fig. 5-1-19.
Fig. 5-1-18.
5-32
4. Contrast Adjustment (PD-126 board)
Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified
value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated
(whitish).
Mode
VTR stop
Signal
Measurement Point
No signal
Pin 1 of CN2105 (VG)
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope
D
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
AA
A = 2.95 ± 0.05V
5. Center Level Adjustment (PD-126 board)
Set the video signal center level of LCD panel to an appropriate
level.
Mode
VTR stop
Signal
Measurement Point
No signal
Pin 1 of CN2105 (VG)
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Digital voltmeter
D
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
AB
A = 7.00 ± 0.05Vdc
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
0
01
01 Set the data.
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
0
01
01 Set the data.
2
D
AA
3
D
AA
4
5
0
01
Change the data and set the
voltage (A) between the 3 steps
peak and pedestal to the
specified value.
(The data should be “00” to
“7F”.)
Press PAUSE button.
00
Set the data.
Check that the specified value of
“Bright Adjustment” is satisfied.
3 steps peak
A
2H
Pedestal
Fig. 5-1-20.
5-33
2
3
0C
60
3
3
22
08
4
D
AB
5
D
AB
6
3
0C
00
7
3
22
00
8
0
01
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Change the data and set the DC
voltage (A) to the specified
value.
(The data should be “00” to
“7F”.)
Press PAUSE button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data.
7. White Balance Adjustment (PD-126 board)
Correct the white balance.
If deviated, the reproduction of the LCD screen may degenerate.
Mode
VTR stop
6. V-COM Adjustment (PD-126 board)
Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the
specified value.
If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker and
conspicuous vertical lines.
Mode
VTR stop
Signal
Measurement Point
No signal
Check on LCD display
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
D
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
A4
The brightness difference between the
section A and section B is minimum.
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
0
01
01 Set the data.
A4
3
D
A4
Change the data so that the
brightness of the section A and
that of the section B is equal.
(The data should be “80” to
“BF”.)
Subtract 3 from the data.
4
5
D
0
A4
01
Press PAUSE button.
Set the data.
00
B
A
A
B
B
A
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
D
A8, A9
The LCD screen should not be
colored.
Note1: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts.
If necessary, adjust them.
1. LCD panel
2. Light induction plate
3. IC2101
Note2: Use the AC power adaptor.
Adjusting method:
D
No signal
Check on LCD screen
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
Note: Perform “Bright Adjustment”, “Black Limit Adjustment”, “Contrast
Adjustment” and “Center Level Adjustment” before this adjustment.
2
Signal
Measurement Point
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
0
01
01 Set the data.
2
D
A8
90
3
D
A9
6F
4
D
A9
5
D
A8
6
D
A8
7
D
A9
8
D
A9
9
D
A9
10
0
01
Check that the LCD screen is
not colored. If not colored,
proceed to step 10.
Change the data so that the LCD
screen is not colored.
Press PAUSE button.
Change the data so that the LCD
screen is not colored.
Press PAUSE button.
A
B
Fig. 5-1-21.
5-34
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
00
If the LCD screen is colored,
repeat steps 5 to 9.
Set the data.
5-2. MECHANISM SECTION
ADJUSTMENT
On the mechanism section adjustment
For details of mechanism section adjustments, checks,
and replacement of mechanism parts, refer to the separate
volume “DV MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
J Mechanism ”.
2-1.
1)
2)
3)
4)
2-3.
1. Preparation for Adjustment
1) Clean the tape running side (tape guide, drum, capstan shaft,
pinch roller, etc.).
2) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC jack.
3) Turn the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander
to the ON position.
4) Connect an oscilloscope to VC-245 board CN004 via the CPC6 flexible jig (J-6082-370-B) and CPC-6 terminal board jig (J6082-371-A).
Channel 1: VC-245 board, CN004 Pin w; (Note)
External trigger: VC-245 board, CN004 Pin qj
HOW TO ENTER RECORD MODE WITHOUT
CASSETTE
Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC jack.
Turn the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander
to the ON position.
Close the cassette compartment without the cassette.
Select page: 3, address: 01, set data: 0C, and press the PAUSE
button of the adjustment remote commander.
(The mechanism enters the record mode automatically.)
Note: Connect a 75 Ω resistor between pins w; of CN004 and ql
(GND).
75 Ω resistor (Parts code: 1-247-804-11)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Note: The function buttons become inoperable.
5)
To quit the record mode, select page: 3, address: 01, set data:
00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote
commander. (Whenever you want to quit the record mode, be
sure to quit following this procedure.)
2-2.
1)
2)
3)
4)
HOW TO ENTER PLAYBACK MODE
WITHOUT CASSETTE
Playback the alignment tape for tracking. (XH2-1)
Select page: 3, address: 33, and set data: 08.
Select page: 3, address: 26, and set data: 31.
Check that the oscilloscope RF waveform is normal at the
entrance and exit.
If not normal, adjust according to the separate volume
“DV MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
J Mechanism ” .
CN004 of VC-245 board
Pin No.
Signal Name
1
LANC SIG
3
5
EVF VCO
7
9
11
13
TCK
15
TDO
17
SWP
19
GND
Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC jack.
Turn the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander
to the ON position.
Close the cassette compartment without the cassette.
Select page: 3, address: 01, set data: 0B, and press the PAUSE
button of the adjustment remote commander.
(The mechanism enters the playback mode automatically.)
Note: The function buttons become inoperable.
5)
TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT
To quit the playback mode, select page: 3, address: 01, set data:
00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote
commander. (Whenever you want to quit the playback mode,
be sure to quit following this procedure.)
Pin No.
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
Signal Name
EVF VG
GND
TMS
TDI
GND
RF IN/LANC JACK IN
RF MON
2. Procedure after operations
1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC jack
and set the HOLD switch to the ON position.
2) Select page: 3, address: 26, and set data: 00.
3) Select page: 3, address: 33, and set data: 00.
Entrance side
Check this section
(Normal waveform)
CH1
CH2
(Trigger)
3.3msec
Fig. 5-2-1.
5-35
Exit side
5-3. VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENTS
NTSC model : DCR-PC5
PAL model : DCR-PC4E/PC5E
3-1.
PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS
Use the following measuring instruments for video section
adjustments.
3-1-1.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
Equipment Required
TV monitor
Oscilloscope (dual-phenomenon, band above 30 MHz with
delay mode) (Unless specified otherwise, use a 10 : 1 probe.)
Frequency counter
Pattern generator with video output terminal.
Digital voltmeter
Audio generator
Audio level meter
Audio distortion meter
Audio attenuator
Regulated power supply
Alignment tapes
• Tracking standard (XH2-1)
Parts code: 8-967-997-01
• SW/OL standard (XH2-3)
Parts code: 8-967-997-11
• Audio operation check for NTSC (XH5-3)
Parts code: 8-967-997-51
• System operation check for NTSC (XH5-5)
Parts code: 8-967-997-61
• BIST check for NTSC (XH5-6)
Parts code: 8-967-997-71
• Audio operation check for PAL (XH5-3P)
Parts code: 8-967-997-55
• System operation check for PAL (XH5-5P)
Parts code: 8-967-997-66
• BIST check for PAL (XH5-6P)
Parts code: 8-967-997-76
Adjustment remote commander (J-6082-053-B)
CPC-6 flexible jig (J-6082-370-B) (Note)
CPC-6 terminal board jig (J-6082-371-A)
Note: When using the old CPC-6 jig (J-6082-370-A), open the cabinet
(R) assembly.
5-36
Note 1: Setting the “Forced VTR Power ON” mode (VTR mode)
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 02, and press the PAUSE
button of the adjustment remote commander.
The above procedure will enable the VTR power to be turned on
with the cabinet (L) (Control switch block (FK-30350)) removed.
After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Power
ON mode”.
3-1-2. Precautions on Adjusting
1) The adjustments of this unit are performed in the VTR mode
or camera mode.
To set to the VTR mode, set the power switch to “VCR” (or
“PLAYER”) or set the “Forced VTR Power ON mode” using
the adjustment remote commander (Note 1).
To set to the Camera mode, set the power switch to “CAMERA”
or set the “Forced Camera Power ON mode” using the
adjustment remote commander (Note 2).
After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced
VTR Power ON Mode” or “Forced Camera Power ON Mode”.
(Note 3)
2) To remove the cabinet (R), disconnect the following connectors.
1. VC-245 board CN005 (14P, 0.8mm)
2. VC-245 board CN006 (8P, 0.8mm)
3. VC-245 board CN003 (60P, 0.4mm)
As the Battery terminal, AUDIO/VIDEO jack and LANC jack
are provided on the BJ-1 board of the cabinet (R), the BJ-1
board must be connected to the VC-245 board. So remove the
BJ-1 board from the cabinet (R). To remove The BJ-1 board
from the cabinet (R), disconnect the following connector (The
LCD block needs not to be connected.)
BJ-1 board CN3104 (2P, 0.8mm)
And connect the BJ-1 board to the following connector of VC245 board.
VC-245 board CN003 (60P, 0.4mm)
3) The Lens block and EVF block need not to be connected. To
remove them, disconnect the following connectors.
1. VC-245 board CN001 (88P, 0.4mm)
2. CF-75 board CN3353 (8P, 0.5mm)
4) As removing CN002 of VC-245 board (removing the control
switch block (FK-30350)) means removing the lithium 3V
power supply, data such as date, time, user-set menus will be
lost. After completing adjustments, reset these data. If the
CN002 has been removed, the self-diagnosis data, data on
history of use (total drum rotation time etc.) will be lost. Before
removing, note down the self-diagnosis data (data of page: 2,
address: B0 to C6) and the data on history use (data of page: 2,
address: A2 to AA). (Refer to “5-4.Service Mode” for the data
on the history use and the self-diagnosis data.)
5) If the “Forced VTR power ON” mode is set, the cabinet (L)
(power switch, control switch block (FK-30350), and speaker)
need not be connected. To remove the cabinet (L), disconnect
the following connectors.
VC-245 board CN002 (39P, 0.3mm)
Note 2: Setting the “Forced Camera Power ON” mode (Camera mode)
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE
button of the adjustment remote commander.
The above procedure will enable the camera power to be turned
on with the cabinet (L) (Control switch block (FK-30350))
removed.
After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Power
ON mode”.
Note 3: Setting the “Forced Memory Power ON” mode (Memory mode)
(DCR-PC5/PC5E)
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 05, and press the PAUSE
button of the adjustment remote commander.
The above procedure will enable the memory power to be turned
on with the cabinet (L) (Control switch block (FK-30350))
removed.
After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Power
ON mode”.
Note 4: Exiting the “Forced Power ON” mode
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE
button of the adjustment remote commander.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
5-37
3-1-3. Adjusting Connectors
Some of the adjusting points of the video section are concentrated
at VC-245 board CN004. Connect the measuring instruments via
the CPC-6 flexible jig (J-6082-370-B) and CPC-6 terminal board
jig (J-6082-371-A). The following table lists the pin numbers and
signal names of CN004.
Pin No.
Signal Name
Pin No.
Signal Name
1
2
LANC SIG
3
4
EVF VG
5
EVF VCO
6
GND
7
8
9
10
11
12
TMS
13
14
TCK
TDI
15
TDO
16
GND
17
18
SWP
RF IN/LANC JACK IN
19
20
GND
RF MON
CN004
2
1
20
19
Remove the CPC lid
Screw (M1.7 × 2.5)
Fig. 5-3-1
Table 5-3-1.
3-1-4. Connecting the Equipment
Connect the measuring instruments as shown in Fig. 5-3-2, and
perform the adjustments.
TV monitor
VIDEO
(Yellow)
Main unit
AUDIO L (White)
Adjustment
remote
commander
AUDIO R (Red)
LANC jack
AUDIO/VIDEO jack
Fig. 5-3-2.
5-38
3-1-5. Alignment Tapes
Use the alignment tapes shown in the following table.
Use tapes specified in the signal column of each adjustment.
Name
Tracking standard (XH2-1)
SW/OL standard (XH2-3)
Audio operation check
(XH5-3 (NTSC), XH5-3P (PAL))
System operation check
(XH5-5 (NTSC), XH5-5P (PAL))
BIST check
(XH5-6 (NTSC), XH5-6P (PAL))
Use
Tape path adjustment
Switching position adjustment
Audio system adjustment
Operation check
BIST check
Fig. 5-3-3 shows the 75% color bar signals recorded on the alignment
tape for Audio Operation Check.
Note: Measure with video terminal (Terminated at 75 Ω)
Y
ello
White
(75%)
1V
Blue
Green
w
Magenta
Cy
Red
Burst signal
0.714V
an
White (75%)
Y
White (100%)
ello
an
Green
Magenta
w
Red
Blue Cy
For NTSC model
0.286V
0.286V
Q
Q
I
I
Black
White
(100%)
Horizontal sync signal
Color bar signal waveform
Color bar pattern
Y
ello
Blac
Blue
Red
Cy
0.3V
Magenta
w
White
an
k
0.7V
1V
Green
Y
White (100%)
ello
Magenta
w
Red
Blue Cy
an
Green
For PAL model
(100%)
0.3V
Burst signal
Horizontal sync signal
Color bar signal waveform
Color bar pattern
Fig. 5-3-3. Color bar signal of alignment tapes
3-1-6. Input/Output Level and Impedance
Video input/output
Special stereo mini jack
Video signal:
1 Vp-p, 75 Ω unbalanced,
sync negative
S video input/output
4-pin mini DIN
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω unbalanced,
sync negative
Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p, 75 Ω unbalanced (NTSC)
: 0.300 Vp-p, 75 Ω unbalanced (PAL)
Audio input/output
Special stereo mini jack
Input level: 327mV
Input impedance: More than 47kΩ
Output level: 327 mV (at load impedance 47 kΩ)
Output impedance: Below 2.2 kΩ
5-39
3-2.
2-2. Serial No. Input
Write the serial No. and model code in the EEPROM (nonvolatile
memory). Convert the serial No. on the name plate from decimal to
hexadecimal, and write in the EEPROM.
Page
C
SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
1. Initialization of B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 Page Data
If the B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 page data is erased due to some reason,
perform “1-2. INITIALIZATION OF B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 PAGE
DATA”, of “5-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT”
Address
2. Serial No. Input
2-1. Company ID Input
Write the company ID in the EEPROM (nonvolatile memory).
Page
C
Address
Input method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Read the serial No. on the name plate, and take it as D1.
Example: If the serial No. is 77881.
D1=77881
3) Obtain D2 and H1 corresponding to D1 from Table 5-3-2.
Example: If D1 is “77881”.
D2=D1–65536=12345
H1=FE
H1 (Hexadecimal)
D1 (Decimal)
D2 (Decimal)
(Service model code)
000001 to 065535 D1
FE
065536 to 131071 D1–65536
FE
131072 to 196607 D1–131072
FE
E8, E9, EA, EB, EC
Input method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Input the following data to page: C, addresses: E8 to EC.
Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander
each time to set the data.
Address
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
3)
ED, EE, EF
Data
08
00
46
01
01
Table 5-3-2.
4)
Input H1 to page: C, address: ED. (Model code input)
Example: If H1 is “FE”.
Select page: C, address: ED, set data: FE, and
press the PAUSE button.
5) Obtain the maximum decimal not exceeding D2 from Table 53-3, and take this as D3.
Example: If D2 is “12345”.
D3=12288
6) Obtain the hexadecimal corresponding to D3 from Table 5-3-3,
and take this as H3.
Example: If D3 is “12288”.
H3=3000
7) Obtain the difference D4 between D 2 and D 3. (Decimal
calculation, 0 D4 255)
D4= D2–D3
Example: If D2 is “12345” and D3 is “12288”.
D4=12345–12288=57
8) Convert D4 to hexadecimal, and take this as H4.
(Refer to “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion table” in “5-4.
Service Mode”.)
Example: If D4 is “57”.
H4=39
9) Input the upper 2 digits of H3 to page: C, address: EE.
Example: If H3 is “3000”.
Select page: C, address: EE, set data: 30, and
press the PAUSE button.
10) Input H4 to page: C, address: EF.
Example: If H4 is “39”.
Select page: C, address: EF, set data: 39, and
press the PAUSE button.
11) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
5-40
HexaHexaHexaHexaHexaHexaHexaHexaDecimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal
(D3)
(D3)
(D3)
(D3)
(D3)
(D3)
(D3)
(D3)
(H3)
(H3)
(H3)
(H3)
(H3)
(H3)
(H3)
(H3)
0
256
512
768
1024
1280
1536
1792
2048
2304
2560
2816
3072
3328
3584
3840
4096
4352
4608
4864
5120
5376
5632
5888
6144
6400
6656
6912
7168
7424
7680
7936
0000
0100
0200
0300
0400
0500
0600
0700
0800
0900
0A00
0B00
0C00
0D00
0E00
0F00
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
1A00
1B00
1C00
1D00
1E00
1F00
8192
8448
8704
8960
9216
9472
9728
9984
10240
10496
10752
11008
11264
11520
11776
12032
12288
12544
12800
13056
13312
13568
13824
14080
14336
14592
14848
15104
15360
15616
15872
16128
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
2600
2700
2800
2900
2A00
2B00
2C00
2D00
2E00
2F00
3000
3100
3200
3300
3400
3500
3600
3700
3800
3900
3A00
3B00
3C00
3D00
3E00
3F00
16384
16640
16896
17152
17408
17664
17920
18176
18432
18688
18944
19200
19456
19712
19968
20224
20480
20736
20992
21248
21504
21760
22016
22272
22528
22784
23040
23296
23552
23808
24064
24320
4000
4100
4200
4300
4400
4500
4600
4700
4800
4900
4A00
4B00
4C00
4D00
4E00
4F00
5000
5100
5200
5300
5400
5500
5600
5700
5800
5900
5A00
5B00
5C00
5D00
5E00
5F00
24576
24832
25088
25344
25600
25856
26112
26368
26624
26880
27136
27392
27648
27904
28160
28416
28672
28928
29184
29440
29696
29952
30208
30464
30720
30976
31232
31488
31744
32000
32256
32512
6000
6100
6200
6300
6400
6500
6600
6700
6800
6900
6A00
6B00
6C00
6D00
6E00
6F00
7000
7100
7200
7300
7400
7500
7600
7700
7800
7900
7A00
7B00
7C00
7D00
7E00
7F00
32768
33024
33280
33536
33792
34048
34304
34560
34816
35072
35328
35584
35840
36096
36352
36608
36864
37120
37376
37632
37888
38144
38400
38656
38912
39168
39424
39680
39936
40192
40448
40704
Table 5-3-3.
5-41
8000
8100
8200
8300
8400
8500
8600
8700
8800
8900
8A00
8B00
8C00
8D00
8E00
8F00
9000
9100
9200
9300
9400
9500
9600
9700
9800
9900
9A00
9B00
9C00
9D00
9E00
9F00
40960 A000 49152
41216 A100 49408
41472 A200 49664
41728 A300 49920
41984 A400 50176
42240 A500 50432
42496 A600 50688
42752 A700 50944
43008 A800 51200
43264 A900 51456
43520 AA00 51712
43776 AB00 51968
44032 AC00 52224
44288 AD00 52480
44544 AE00 52736
44800 AF00 52992
45056 B000 53248
45312 B100 53504
45568 B200 53760
45824 B300 54016
46080 B400 54272
46336 B500 54528
46592 B600 54784
46848 B700 55040
47104 B800 55296
47360 B900 55552
47616 BA00 55808
47872 BB00 56064
48128 BC00 56320
48384 BD00 56576
48640 BE00 56832
48896 BF00 57088
C000
C100
C200
C300
C400
C500
C600
C700
C800
C900
CA00
CB00
CC00
CD00
CE00
CF00
D000
D100
D200
D300
D400
D500
D600
D700
D800
D900
DA00
DB00
DC00
DD00
DE00
DF00
57344
57600
57856
58112
58368
58624
58880
59136
59392
59648
59904
60160
60416
60672
60928
61184
61440
61696
61952
62208
62464
62720
62976
63232
63488
63744
64000
64256
64512
64768
65024
65280
E000
E100
E200
E300
E400
E500
E600
E700
E800
E900
EA00
EB00
EC00
ED00
EE00
EF00
F000
F100
F200
F300
F400
F500
F600
F700
F800
F900
FA00
FB00
FC00
FD00
FE00
FF00
3. Touch Panel Adjustment (VC-245 board)
Adjust the calibration of the touch panel.
Mode
VTR stop
Signal
Adjustment Page
Arbitrary
D
Adjustment Address
E0 to E3
4. Battery End Check (VC-245 board)
Check the battery end voltage.
Mode
Camera recording and VTR playback
Subject
Arbitrary
Note: It is normal though the following symptoms appear during the battery
end check.
1) The message of “FOR InfoLITHIUM BATTERY ONLY” on
the LCD or viewfinder screen.
2) The tally lamp is flashing.
Note 1: Protect the Touch panel (LCD screen) with a transparent sheet.
Note 2: Turn off the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander.
Adjusting method:
1) While pressing the DISPLAY button, set the POWER switch
from OFF to VCR (or PLAYER).
2) Using a ball-point pen etc., push the center of “×” indicated in
the part A.
3) Using a ball-point pen etc., push the center of “×” indicated in
the part B.
4) Using a ball-point pen etc., push the center of “×” indicated in
the part C.
Connection:
1) Connect the regulated power supply and the digital voltmeter
to the battery terminal as shown in Fig. 5-3-5.
Checking method:
1) Adjust the output voltage of the regulated power supply so that
the digital voltmeter display is 3.5 ± 0.1Vdc.
2) Turn off the power supply.
3) Turn on the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote
commander.
4) Turn on the power supply.
5) Load a cassette, and set to the camera recording mode.
6) Decrease the output voltage of the regulated power supply so
that the digital voltmeter display is 3.3 ± 0.1Vdc.
7) Record the camera signal for a minute.
8) Playback the recorded section and check that the playback
picture and sound are normal.
A
C
B
Regulated power supply
+
+
Fig. 5-3-4.
3.3 ± 0.01 Vdc
+
Digital volt meter
Fig. 5-3-5.
5-42
3-3.
2. PLL f0 & LPF f0 Adjustment (VC-245 Board)
SERVO AND RF SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
Before perform the servo and RF system adjustments, check that
the specified value of “36 MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment” of
“CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” is satisfied.
Adjusting Procedure:
1. Cap FG duty adjustment
2. PLL f0 & LPF f0 adjustment
3. Switching position adjustment
4. AGC center level
5. APC & AEQ adjustment
Mode
VTR stop
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Display data of page: 3, address: 03
Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
C
1F, 20, 22, 29
Specified Value
Bit2, bit3, bit4 and bit6 are “0”
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1. Cap FG Duty Adjustment (VC-245 Board)
Set the Cap FG signal duty cycle to 50% to establish an appropriate
capstan servo. If deviated, the uneven rotation of capstan and noise
can occur.
Measurement Point
Display data of page: 3, address: 03
1
2
0
3
01
01
3
3
02
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Adjustment remote commander
C
4
3
03
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
16
00
5
0
01
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
Close the cassette compartment
without inserting a cassette.
0
3
01
01
01
1B
4
3
02
Check that the data changes in
the following order.
“1B” → “2B” → “00”
5
3
03
6
0
01
Check that the data is “00”.
(Note)
Set the data.
00
Procedure
Set the data.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data changes to
“00”.
Check that bit2, bit3, bit4 and
bit6 are “0”. (Note)
00
Set the data.
Note: If bit2, bit3, bit4 or bit6 of the data is “1”, there are errors.
For the error contents, see the following table. (For the bit values,
refer to “5-4. SERVICE MODE”, “4-3. 3. Bit value discrimination”.)
Adjusting method:
2
3
01
30
Set the data.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Note: If the data is “01”, adjustment has errors or the mechanism deck is
defective.
5-43
Bit value of page: 3,
Error contents
address: 03 data
bit 4 = 1
PLL f0 is defective
bit 6 = 1
bit 3 = 1
bit 2 = 1
LPF f0 is defective
PLL f0 final adjustment is defective
PLL f0 final adjustment time-out
4. AGC Center Level and APC & AEQ Adjustment
3. Switching Position Adjustment (VC-245 Board)
Mode
VTR playback
Signal
Measurement Point
SW/OL reference tape (XH2-3)
Display data of page: 3, address: 03
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Adjustment remote commander
C
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
10, 11, 12, 13
00
4-1. Preparations before adjustments
Mode
Camera recording
Subject
Arbitrary
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
2
30
40
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
Insert the SW/OL reference tape
and enter the VTR STOP mode.
2
3
0
3
01
21
01
4
3
01
0D
5
3
02
6
3
03
7
0
01
00
4-2. AGC Center Level Adjustment (VC-245 Board)
Set the data.
Check that the data is “02”.
(Note1)
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data changes to
“00”.
Check that the data is “00”.
(Note2)
Set the data.
Mode
Signal
Playback
Recorded signal at “Preparations
before adjustments”
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Pin w; of CN004 (RF MON) (Note 1)
Ext. trigger: Pin qj of CN004 (SWP)
Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
C
1E
Specified Value
The data of page: 3, address: 03 is
“00”
Note 1: Connect a 75Ω resistor between Pin w; and Pin ql (GND) of
CN004.
75Ω resistor (Parts code: 1-247-804-11)
Note1: If the data of page: 3, address: 21 is “72”, the tape top being played.
After playing the tape for 1 to 2 seconds, stop it, perform step 4
and higher.
Note2: If bit 0 of the data is “1”, the even channel is defective. If bit 1 is
“1”, the odd channel is defective. Contents of the defect is written
into page: C, addresses: 10 and 12. See the following table. (For
the bit values, refer to “5-4. SERVICE MODE”, “4-3. 3. Bit value
discrimination”.)
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
Playback the recorded signal at
“Preparations before
adjustments”
2
3
When the even channel is defective
Data of page: C, Contents of defect
0
3
01
33
01
08
4
address: 10
EE
Writing into EEPROM (IC502) is defective
E8
E7
Adjustment data is out of range
No data is returned from IC301 (CAIN)
When the odd channel is defective
Data of page: C,
address: 12
Contents of defect
EE
E8
Writing into EEPROM (IC502) is defective
Adjustment data is out of range
E7
No data is returned from IC301 (CAIN)
Procedure
Set the data.
Record the camera signal for
three minutes.
5
3
01
6
7
3
3
02
03
8
23
Set the data.
Set the data.
Confirm that the playback RF
signal is stable. (Fig. 5-3-5.)
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data is “00”.
Check that the data is “00”.
(Note2)
Perform “APC & AEQ
Adjustment”.
Note2: If the data of page: 3, address: 03 is other than “00”, adjustment
has errors. (Take an appropriate remedial measures according to
the errors referring to the following table.)
PB RF signal is stable
Pin w;
Data
Contents of defect
20
30
Perform re-adjustment. (Note 3)
The machine is defective
40
50
Perform re-adjustment. (Note 3)
The machine is defective
Note 3: If this data is displayed twice successively, the machine is defective.
Pin qj
6.7 msec
Fig. 5-3-5.
5-44
4-3. APC & AEQ Adjustment (VC-245 Board)
Mode
Playback
Signal
Recorded signal at “Preparations
before adjustments”
Pin w; of CN004 (RF MON) (Note 1)
Ext. trigger: Pin qj of CN004 (SWP)
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope
C
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
18, 19, 1B, 1C, 21, 2C
The data of page: 3, address: 03 is
“00”
4-4. Processing after Completing Adjustments
Order Page Address Data
Note 1: Connect a 75Ω resistor between Pin w; and Pin ql (GND) of
CN004.
75Ω resistor (Parts code: 1-247-804-11)
Note 2: The “AGC Center Level Adjustment” must have already been
completed before starting this adjustment.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
Playback the recorded signal at
“Preparations before
adjustments”
2
3
0
3
01
33
01
08
4
5
3
01
6
3
02
7
3
03
8
07
Set the data.
Set the data.
Confirm that the playback RF
signal is stable. (Fig. 5-3-6.)
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data changes
from “07” to “00” in about 20
seconds after pressing PAUSE
button.
Check that the data is “00”.
(Note3)
Perform “Processing after
Completing Adjustments”.
Note3: If the data is other than “00”, adjustment has errors. Take an
appropriate remedial measures according to the errors referring to
the following table.
Data
20
Contents of defect
Perform re-adjustment. (Note 4)
30
50
The machine is defective
Perform re-adjustment. (Note 4)
60
80
The machine is defective
The machine is defective
Note 4: If this data is displayed twice successively, the machine is defective.
PB RF signal is stable
Pin w;
Pin qj
6.7 msec
Fig. 5-3-6.
5-45
Procedure
1
2
2
3
30
33
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
3
0
01
00
Set the data.
3-4.
2. S VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment (VC-245 Board)
VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
Before perform the video system adjustments, check that the
specified value of “36MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment” of
“CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” is satisfied.
3-4-1. Base Band Block Adjustments
1. Chroma BPF f0 Adjustment (VC-245 Board)
Set the center frequency of IC1301 chroma band-pass filter.
Mode
Camera
Subject
Measurement Point
All black
(Cover the lens with the lens cap)
CH1: Chroma signal terminal of
S VIDEO jack (75Ω terminated)
CH2: Y signal terminal of S VIDEO
jack (75Ω terminated)
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope
C
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
28
A = 100mVp-p or less
B = 200mVp-p or more
3
0C
4
C
28
5
6
C
3
28
0C
04
00
7
8
0
01
00
Arbitrary
Y signal terminal of S VIDEO jack
(75Ω terminated)
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope
C
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
25
A = 1000 ± 14mV
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
0
01
01 Set the data.
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
0
01
01 Set the data.
3
Camera
Subject
Measurement Point
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
2
Mode
Check that the burst signal (B) is
output to the chroma signal
terminal of S VIDEO jack.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Change the data for minimum
amplitude of the burst signal
level (A).
(The data should be “00” to
“07”.)
2
3
2
2
35
35
01
4
3
0C
02
5
C
25
6
7
C
3
25
0C
8
2
35
9
0
01
00
00
Note down the data.
Set the data.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Change the data and set the Y
signal level (A) to the specified
value.
Press PAUSE button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data that is noted down at
step 2.
Set the data.
Center of luminance line
A
Press PAUSE button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the burst signal level
(B) satisfies the specified value.
Set the data.
H
Fig. 5-3-8.
When the data of page: 3, address: 0C, is 04:
A
CH1
CH2
H
When the data of page: 3, address: 0C, is 00:
CH1
B
H
Fig. 5-3-7.
5-46
4. VIDEO OUT Y, Chroma Level Check (VC-245 Board)
3. S VIDEO OUT Chroma Level Adjustment
(VC-245 Board)
Mode
Camera
Subject
Measurement Point
Arbitrary
Chroma signal terminal of S VIDEO
jack (75Ω terminated)
External trigger: Y signal terminal of
S VIDEO jack
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope
C
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
26, 27
Cr level:
2
2
35
35
01
4
3
0C
02
5
C
26
C
26
27
8
C
27
3
0C
11
2
35
12
0
01
Oscilloscope
Sync level: A = 286 ± 18mV(NTSC)
A = 300 ± 18mV(PAL)
Burst level: B = 286 ± 18mV(NTSC)
B = 300 ± 18mV(PAL)
2
3
2
3
35
0C
01
02
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Change the data and set the Cr
signal level (A) to the specified
value.
Press PAUSE button.
Set the data.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the sync signal level
(A) satisfies the specified value.
Check that the burst signal level
(B) satisfies the specified value.
5
Note down the data.
Set the data.
6
3
0C
7
2
35
8
0
01
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data that is noted down at
step 1.
00
Set the data.
Change the data and set the Cb
signal level (B) to the specified
value.
Press PAUSE button.
9
10
Measuring Instrument
Specified Value
4
2
3
C
Arbitrary
VIDEO terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO
jack (75Ω terminated)
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
2
35
Note down the data.
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
0
01
01 Set the data.
7
Camera
Subject
Measurement Point
Adjusting method:
A = 714 ± 14mV(NTSC)
A = 700 ± 14mV(PAL)
Cb level: B = 714 ± 14mV(NTSC)
B = 700 ± 14mV(PAL)
Burst level: C = 286 ± 6mV(NTSC)
C = 300 ± 6mV(PAL)
Adjusting method:
6
Mode
Check that the burst signal level
(C) is satisfied the specified value.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
00
B
A
H
Set the data that is noted down at
step 2.
Set the data.
00
Fig. 5-3-10.
H
C
A
0.28 µsec (NTSC)
0.23 µsec (PAL)
B
0.28 µsec (NTSC)
0.23 µsec (PAL)
Fig. 5-3-9.
5-47
1-3. IC301 AUD (ABUS) PB BIST Check
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
3-4-2. BIST Check
Switch setting:
LCD panel ...................................................................... Open
1
3
11
04
1. Playback System Check
2
3
12
08
3
3
12
00
Set the POWER switch to VCR
or PLAYER position.
Connect the adjustment remote
commander and set the HOLD
switch to ON (SERVICE)
position.
4
3
13
03
5
3
14
Set the data.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
6
3
15
7
3
1-1. Preparations for Playback
Order Page Address Data
1
2
3
4
0
C
01
42
5
01
00
Procedure
Playback the BIST check tape.
(XH5-6 (NTSC), XH5-6P (PAL))
Press DISPLAY button and erase
the indicators on the LCD screen.
6
Note1: Perform the following checks in the playback mode.
Note2: Use the AC power adaptor or the battery (Info LITHIUM S series).
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
3
70
04 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
2
3
70
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3
4
3
5
3
73
74
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: 41
PAL model: 2D
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: 81
PAL model: 7C
If the data of address 14 and
address 15 are correct, IC301
AUD (ABUS) playback system
is normal.
1-4. IC301 VFD PB BIST Check
• EX Y BIST Check
Order Page Address Data
1-2. IC301 TRX (RF) PB BIST Check
3
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data is equal to
either of the following values.
And memorize the case number
of the value.
NTSC model:
63 (Case1), C5 (Case2),
75 (Case3), D3 (Case4),
59 (Case5), FF (Case6)
PAL model:
86 (Case1), AA (Case2),
90 (Case3)
Check that the data is equal to
the following value which case
number is equal to that of
address 73.
NTSC model:
84 (Case1), 55 (Case2),
07 (Case3), D6 (Case4),
01 (Case5), D0 (Case6)
PAL model:
35 (Case1), 33 (Case2),
B6 (Case3)
If the data of address 73 and
address 74 are correct, IC301
TRX (RF) playback system is
normal.
5-48
1
3
12
10
2
3
12
00
3
3
13
04
4
3
14
5
3
15
6
3
Procedure
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: FB
PAL model: 54
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: F4
PAL model: ED
If the data of address 14 and
address 15 are correct, IC301
EX Y playback system is
normal.
• EVF Y BIST Check
Order Page Address Data
1
3
10
88
2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
5
3
14
6
3
15
7
3
• EVF Cr BIST Check
Order Page Address Data
1
3
10
89
2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
5
3
14
6
3
15
7
3
• EVF Cb BIST Check
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
1
3
10
8A
2
3
12
10
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: 9B
PAL model: 20
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: C3
PAL model: F8
5
3
14
6
3
15
If the data of address 14 and
address 15 are correct, IC301
EVF Y playback system is
normal.
7
3
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
If the data of address 14 and
address 15 are correct, IC301
EVF Cb playback system is
normal.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
1
3
10
98
2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: 2E
PAL model: 33
4
3
13
04
5
3
14
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: 34
PAL model: DD
If the data of address 14 and
address 15 are correct, IC301
EVF Cr playback system is
normal.
6
3
15
7
3
5-49
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: A9
PAL model: AA
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: 39
PAL model: 03
• PANEL Y BIST Check
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: 9B
PAL model: 20
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: C3
PAL model: F8
If the data of address 14 and
address 15 are correct, IC301
PANEL Y playback system is
normal.
• PANEL Cr BIST Check
Order Page Address Data
1
3
10
99
2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
5
3
14
6
7
3
15
3
3
10
9A
2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
6
7
3
3
1
2
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
14
15
0
8
01
21
01
0F
Procedure
Set the data.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
• ENCODER Ya BIST Check
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
3
10
8B Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
If the data of address 14 and
address 15 are correct, IC301
PANEL Cr playback system is
normal.
1
3
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: 2E
PAL model: 33
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: 34
PAL model: DD
• PANEL Cb BIST Check
Order Page Address Data
5
1-5. IC301 ENCODER BIST Check
• Preparations
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
5
3
14
6
3
15
7
3
• ENCODER Yb BIST Check
Order Page Address Data
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: A9
PAL model: AA
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: 39
PAL model: 03
If the data of address 14 and
address 15 are correct, IC301
PANEL Cb playback system is
normal.
5-50
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: FD
PAL model: 58
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: 3E
PAL model: BE
If the data of address 14 and
address 15 are correct, IC301
ENCORDER Ya playback
system is normal.
Procedure
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
1
3
10
8C
2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
5
3
14
6
3
15
7
3
Procedure
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: 94
PAL model: A1
Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: D6
PAL model: ED
If the data of address 14 and
address 15 are correct, IC301
ENCORDER Yb playback
system is normal.
• ENCODER Ca BIST Check
Order Page Address Data
1
3
10
8D
2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
5
3
6
3
7
3
14
1-6. Processing after Completing Playback System
Check
Procedure
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Order Page Address Data
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data is equal to
either of the following values.
And memorize the case number
of the value.
NTSC model:
11 (Case1), 4E (Case2)
PAL model:
E8 (Case1), 7B (Case2)
Check that the data is equal to
the following value which case
number is equal to that of
address 14.
NTSC model:
FD (Case1), 3B (Case2)
PAL model:
62 (Case1), B0 (Case2)
15
• ENCODER Cb BIST Check
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
3
10
8E Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
2
3
12
10
3
3
12
00
4
3
13
04
5
3
14
6
3
15
7
3
0
C
01
42
01
Set the data.
Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
00: DCR-PC4E
28: DCR-PC5/PC5E
3
8
21
03
4
0
01
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data.
5
If the data of address 14 and
address 15 are correct, IC301
ENCODER Ca playback system
is normal.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data is equal to
either of the following values.
And memorize the case number
of the value.
NTSC model:
5C (Case1), BC (Case2)
PAL model:
96 (Case1), 35 (Case2)
Check that the data is equal to
the following value which case
number is equal to that of
address 14.
NTSC model:
20 (Case1), A8 (Case2)
PAL model:
79 (Case1), 7C (Case2)
If the data of address 14 and
address 15 are correct, IC301
ENCODER Cb playback system
is normal.
5-51
Procedure
1
2
Turn off the power and turn on
again.
2. Recording System Check
2-3. Processing after Completing Recording System
Check
2-1. Preparations for recording
Order Page Address Data
1
2
3
10
C0
3
3
11
07
4
5
Order Page Address Data
Playback the BIST check tape.
(XH5-6(NTSC), XH5-6P(PAL))
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
1
2
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Enter the stop mode.
While keep the HOLD switch of
the adjustment remote
commander at ON (SERVICE)
position, eject the BIST check
tape.
Close the cassette compartment
without inserting a cassette.
6
7
8
Procedure
3
01
0C
Set the power switch to
“CAMERA”.
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
2-2. IC301 TRX (RF) REC BIST Check
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
1
3
70
04 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
2
3
70
3
3
71
4
3
72
5
3
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Check that the data is equal to
either of the following values.
And memorize the case number
of the value.
NTSC model:
26 (Case1), 5E (Case2)
PAL model:
53 (Case1), 77 (Case2)
Check that the data is equal to
the following value which case
number is equal to that of
address 71.
NTSC model:
95 (Case1), E3 (Case2)
PAL model:
DF (Case1), D5 (Case2)
If the data of address 71 and
address 72 are correct, IC301
TRX (RF) recording system is
normal.
5-52
3
01
00
Procedure
Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Turn off the power and turn on
again.
3-5.
AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
[Connection of Audio System Measuring Devices]
Connect the audio system measuring devices as shown in Fig. 5-3-11.
Main unit
Recording (Camera mode)
Audio oscillator
600 Ω
MIC
Left
Right
Attenuator
600 Ω: 270 Ω (1-249-410-11) + 330 Ω (1-249-411-11)
Playback
Main unit
TV monitor
Video (Yellow)
Left (White)
AUDIO/
VIDEO
OUT
47k Ω
Audio level meter
or Distortion meter
Right
(Red)
47k Ω
47k Ω (1-249-437-11)
Fig. 5-3-11.
5-53
1. Playback Level Check
Mode
VTR playback
Signal
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Specified Value
4. Overall Noise Level Check
Mode
Camera recording and playback
Alignment tape:
For audio operation check
(XH5-3 (NTSC))
(XH5-3P (PAL))
Audio left or right terminal of AUDIO
VIDEO jack
Signal
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Specified Value
Audio level meter and frequency
counter
32 kHz mode: 1 kHz, +3.0 ± 2.0dBs
48 kHz mode: 1 kHz, +3.0 ± 2.0dBs
44.1 kHz mode:
The 7.35kHz signal level during EMP
OFF is +2.0 ± 2.0dBs.
The 7.35kHz signal level during EMP
ON is –6 ± 2 dB from the signal level
during EMP OFF.
5. Overall Separation Check
Mode
Signal
Camera recording and playback
400Hz, –66dBs signal: MIC jack
<right> [left]
(Connect the MIC jack <left> [right]
to GND)
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Audio <left> [right] terminal of
AUDIO VIDEO jack
Audio level meter
Specified Value
Below –40dBs (IHF-A filter ON)
2. Overall Level Characteristics Check
Camera recording and playback
400Hz, –66 dBs signal: MIC jack left
and right
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Audio left or right terminal of AUDIO
VIDEO jack
Audio level meter
Specified Value
–7.5 ± 3.0dBs
< > : Left channel check
[ ] : Right channel check
Checking Method:
1) Input the 400Hz, –66dBs signal in the <right> [left] terminal
of the MIC jack only.
2) Record in the camera mode.
3) Playback the recorded section.
4) Check that the signal level of the audio <left> [right] terminal
is the specified value.
Checking Method:
1) Input the 400Hz, –66dBs signal in the MIC jack.
2) Record in the camera mode.
3) Playback the recorded section.
4) Check that the 400Hz signal level is the specified value.
3. Overall Distortion Check
Mode
Signal
Camera recording and playback
400Hz, –66dBs signal: MIC jack left
and right
Measurement Point
Audio left or right terminal of AUDIO
VIDEO jack
Audio distortion meter
Measuring Instrument
Specified Value
Audio level meter
Below –45dBs
(IHF-A filter ON, 20kHz LPF ON)
Checking Method:
1) Insert a shorting plug in the MIC jack.
2) Record in the camera mode.
3) Playback the recorded section.
4) Check that the noise level is the specified value.
Checking Method:
1) Check that the playback signal level is the specified value.
Mode
Signal
No signal: Insert a shorting plug in the
MIC jack
Audio left or right terminal of AUDIO
VIDEO jack
Below 0.4%
(200Hz to 6kHz BPF ON)
Checking Method:
1) Input the 400Hz, –66dBs signal in the MIC jack.
2) Record in the camera mode.
3) Playback the recorded section.
4) Check that the distortion is the specified value.
5-54
5-4. SERVICE MODE
4-1.
ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER
2. Precautions upon using
the adjustment remote commander
Mishandling of the adjustment remote commander may erase the
correct adjustment data at times. To prevent this, it is recommended
that all adjustment data be noted down before beginning adjustments
and new adjustment data after each adjustment.
The adjustment remote commander is used for changing the
calculation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The
adjustment remote commander performs bi-directional
communication with the unit using the remote commander signal
line (LANC). The resultant data of this bi-directional communication
is written in the non-volatile memory.
1. Using the adjustment remote commander
1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC
terminal.
2) Set the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander to
“HOLD” (SERVICE position). If it has been properly
connected, the LCD on the adjustment remote commander will
display as shown in Fig. 5-4-1.
Page
Data
Address
Fig. 5-4-1
3)
Operate the adjustment remote commander as follows.
• Changing the page
The page increases when the EDIT SEARCH+ button is
pressed, and decreases when the EDIT SEARCH– button is
pressed. There are altogether 16 pages, from 0 to F.
Hexadecimal
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
notation
LCD Display
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A b c d E F
Decimal notation
conversion value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314 15
4)
• Changing the address
The address increases when the FF (M) button is pressed,
and decreases when the REW (m) button is pressed. There
are altogether 256 addresses, from 00 to FF.
• Changing the data (Data setting)
The data increases when the PLAY (N) button is pressed,
and decreases when the STOP (x) button is pressed. There
are altogether 256 data, from 00 to FF.
• Writing the adjustment data
The PAUSE button must be pressed to write the adjustment
data (B, C, D, F, 7, 8 page) in the nonvolatile memory. (The
new adjusting data will not be recorded in the nonvolatile
memory if this step is not performed.)
After completing all adjustments, turn off the main power
supply once.
5-55
4-2.
DATA PROCESS
The calculation of the DDS display and the adjustment remote
commander display data (hexadecimal notation) are required for
obtaining the adjustment data of some adjustment items. In this case,
after converting the hexadecimal notation to decimal notation,
calculate and convert the result to hexadecimal notation, and use it
as the adjustment data. Indicates the hexadecimal-decimal
conversion table.
Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table
Lower digit of
hexadecimal
0
1
2
3
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
(A)
B
(b)
C
(c)
D
(d)
E
(E)
F
(F)
Upper digit
of hexadecimal
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
2
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
3
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
4
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
77
76
77
78
79
5
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
6
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
7
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
8
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
9
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
A (A)
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
B (b)
176
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
C (c)
177
193
178
192
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
D (d)
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
E (E)
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
F (F)
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
Note: The characters shown in the parenthesis ( ) shown the display on the adjustment remote commander.
(Example) If the DDS display or the adjustment remote commander shows BD (bd);
Because the upper digit of the adjustment number is B (b), and the lower digit is D (d), the meeting point
“189” of 1 and 2 in the above table is the corresponding decimal number.
Table. 5-4-1.
5-56
4-3.
SERVICE MODE
2-1. EMG Code (Emergency Code)
Codes corresponding to the errors which occur are written in
addresses F4, F8 and FC. The type of error indicated by the code
are shown in the following table.
1. Setting the Test Mode
Page D
Address 10
Data
Function
00
Normal
01
Forced camera power ON
02
Forced VTR power ON
03
Forced camera + VTR power ON
05
Forced memory power ON
• Before setting the data , select page: 0, address: 01, and set data:
01.
• For page D, the data set is recorded in the non-volatile memory
by pressing the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote
commander. In this case, take note that the test mode will not be
exited even when the main power is turned off.
• After completing adjustments/repairs, be sure to return the data
of this address to 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment
remote commander.
Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Code
00
10
11
22
23
24
30
40
42
2. Emergence Memory Address
Page C
Address F4 to FF
Address
Contents
F4
EMG code when first error occurs
Upper: MSW code when shift starts when first
error occurs
F6
Lower: MSW code when first error occurs
Lower: MSW code to be moved when first error
F7
occurs
F8
EMG code when second error occurs
Upper: MSW code when shift starts when second
FA
error occurs
Lower: MSW code when second error occurs
Lower: MSW code to be moved when second error
FB
occurs
FC
EMG code when last error occurs
Upper: MSW code when shift starts when last error
occurs
FE
Lower: MSW code when last error occurs
Lower: MSW code to be moved when last error
FF
occurs
When no error occurs in this unit, data “00” is written in the above
addresses (F4 to FF). when first error occurs in the unit, the data
corresponding to the error is written in the first emergency address
(F4 to F7). In the same way, when the second error occurs, the data
corresponding to the error is written in the second emergency address
(F8 to FB). Finally, when the last error occurs, the data corresponding
to the error is written in the last emergency address (FC to FF).
Note: After completing adjustments, be sure to initialize the data of
addresses F4 to FF to “00”.
Initializing method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: 3, address: 01, set data: 37, and press the PAUSE
button.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
5-57
Emergency Type
No error
Loading motor emergency during loading
Loading motor emergency during unloading
T reel emergency during normal rotation
S reel emergency during normal rotation
T reel emergency (Short circuit between S reel
terminal and T reel terminal)
FG emergency at the start up of the capstan
FG emergency at the start up of the drum
FG emergency during normal rotation of the drum
2-2. MSW Code
MSW when errors occur:
Information on MSW (mode SW) when errors occur
MSW when movement starts:
Information on MSW when movements starts when the mechanism position is moved (When the L motor is moved)
MSW of target of movement:
Information on target MSW of movement when the mechanism position is moved
Mechanical Position
← UNLOAD
BL
EJ
LOAD →
ULE
BL
SR
BL
GL
BL
STOP
BL
R/P
1 1 0 = 6
1 1 1 = 7
0 1 0 = 2
1 1 1 = 7
0 1 1 = 3
1 1 1 = 7
0 0 1 = 1
1 1 1 = 7
1 0 1 = 5
1 1 1 = 7
1 0 0 = 4
← C (MSB)
←B
← A (LSB)
LS chassis movement section
Lock released
Cassette compartment
Pinch roller pressing
Position
Code
EJ
4
BL
7
ULE
5
SR
GL
1
3
STOP
2
R/P
6
NULL
0
Contents
Position at which the cassette component lock is released, at the farthest unload side mechanically
at which the mechanism can move no further in the UNLOAD direction.
BLANK code, at the boundary between codes.
EJECT completion position. when the cassette is ejected, the mechanism will stop at this position.
Cassette IN standby. The guide will start protruding out as the mechanism moves towards the
LOAD position.
Position at which it is possible to release the S ratchet.
Guide loading are performed here.
Stop position in the loading state. The pinch roller separates, the tension regulator returns, and the
brake is imposed on both reels.
PB, REC, CUE, REVIEW, PAUSE positions. When pinch roller is pressed, and the tension
regulator is ON, the mechanism is operating at this position in modes in which normal images are
shown.
Code not existing in the MD. Default value.
5-58
3. Bit value discrimination
Bit values must be discriminated using the display data of the
adjustment remote commander for following items. Use the table
below to discriminate if the bit value is “1” or “0”.
Display on the adjustment remote commander
Address
Page
bit3 to bit0 discrimination
bit7 to bit4 discrimination
Display on the
adjustment
remote
commander
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
9
A (A)
B (b)
C (c)
D (d)
E (E)
B
F (F )
bit3
or
bit7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit values
bit2
bit1
or
or
bit6
bit5
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
bit0
or
bit4
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Example: If “8E” is displayed on the adjustment remote commander, the
bit values for bit7 to bit4 are shown in the A column, and the
bit values for bit3 to bit0 are shown in the B column.
4. Switch check (1)
Page 2
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Address 43
Function
When bit value=1
VTR MODE SW (Control switch block)
OFF
CAM STBY SW (Control switch block)
OFF
START/STOP SW (Control switch block)
OFF
EJECT SW (Control switch block)
OFF
CC DOWN SW (Mechanism chassis)
OFF (UP)
PHOTO FREEZE SW (FK-30350 block S4004) OFF
PHOTO STBY SW (Control switch block)
OFF
When bit value=0
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON (DOWN)
ON
ON
Using method:
1) Select page: 2, address: 43.
2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.
5-59
5. Switch check (2)
Page 2
Address 60 to 63
Using method:
1) Select page: 2, address: 60 to 63.
2) By discriminating the display data, the pressed key can be discriminated.
Address
60
(KEY AD0)
(IC1104 od)
61
(KEY AD1)
(IC1104 of)
62
(KEY AD2)
(IC1104 og)
63
(KEY AD3)
(IC1104 oh)
Data
00 (00 to 0A) 19 (0B to 24) 32 (25 to 44) 59 (45 to 6E) 85 (6F to 9F) B8 (A0 to D4) EE (D5 to FF)
FOCUS
FOCUS
PHOTO
SUPER
(INFINITY) (AUTO/MANUAL) (PHOTO REC) NIGHT SHOT
No key input
(FK-30350)(S4007) (FK-30350)(S4008) (FK-30350)(S4005) (FK-30350)(S4003)
DISPLAY
BACK LIGHT
EVF OFF
EVF ON
(FK-30350)
(FK-30350)
(CF-75)
(CF-75)
(S4011)
(S4010)
(S2201)
(S2201)
PANEL
PANEL
REVERSE
NORMAL
(PR-34)(S3601)
(PR-34)(S3601)
PANEL CLOSE
PANEL OPEN
(PO-5)
(PO-5)
(S3501)
(S3501)
6. Record of Use check
Note: When replacing the drum assembly, initialize the data of address: A2 to A4.
Page 2
Address
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
Address A2 to AA
Function
Drum rotation counted time (BCD code)
User initial power on date (BCD code)
Final condensation occurrence date
(BCD code)
Remarks
Minutes
Hour (L)
Hour (H)
Year
Month
Day
Year
Month
Day
10th place digit and 1st place digit of counted time (decimal digit)
1000th place digit and 100th place digit of counted time (decimal digit)
After setting the clock, set the date of power on next.
Using method:
1) The record of use data is displayed at page: 2, addresses: A2 to AA.
Note: This data will be erased (reset) when the control switch block (FK-30350) is removed.
Initializing method:
1) Using the adjustment remote commander, select the object address and set data: 00.
5-60
7. Record of Self-diagnosis check
Page 2
Address B0 to C6
Address
B0
Self-diagnosis code
“Repaired by” code (Occurred 1st time) *1
B1
B2
“Block function” code (Occurred 1st time)
“Detailed” code (Occurred 1st time)
B4
B5
“Repaired by” code (Occurred 2nd time) *1
“Block function” code (Occurred 2nd time)
B6
B8
“Detailed” code (Occurred 2nd time)
“Repaired by” code (Occurred 3rd time) *1
B9
BA
“Block function” code (Occurred 3rd time)
“Detailed” code (Occurred 3rd time)
BC
BD
“Repaired by” code (Occurred 4th time) *1
“Block function” code (Occurred 4th time)
BE
C0
“Detailed” code (Occurred 4th time)
“Repaired by” code (Occurred 5th time) *1
C1
C2
“Block function” code (Occurred 5th time)
“Detailed” code (Occurred 5th time)
C4
C5
“Repaired by” code (Occurred the last time) *1
“Block function” code (Occurred the last time)
C6
“Detailed” code (Occurred the last time)
*1 : “01” → “C”, “03” → “E”
Using method:
1) The past self-diagnosis codes are displayed at page: 2, addresses: BC to C6. Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION” for detail of the
self-diagnosis code.
Note: This data will be erased (reset) when the control switch block (FK-30350) is removed.
5-61E
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
SECTION 6
REPAIR PARTS LIST
6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS
NOTE:
• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may
have some differences from the original one.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they
are seldom required for routine service. Some
delay should be anticipated when ordering these
items.
• The mechanical parts with no reference number
in the exploded views are not supplied.
•
Abbreviation
AUS: Australian model
JE:
Tourist model
CND: Canadian model
CN: Chinese model
HK: Hong Kong model
The components identified by mark 0 or
dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
Les composants identifiés par une marque
0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant
le numéro spécifié.
6-1-1. OVERALL SECTION
4
3
2
1
5
Cabinet (L) section
(See page 6-5)
D
C
1
6
Lens-EVF section
(See page 6-4)
5
4
-2
VCard
Bo
D
Cabinet (R) block assembly
(See page 6-2 to 6-3)
1
A
B
A
B
C
7
10
9
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remarks
1
2
3
4
5
3-989-735-11
3-062-213-01
3-724-511-51
3-056-624-01
1-475-141-31
SCREW(M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2
COVER, MIC
SHOE, ACCESSORY
LOCK ACE, +K SCREW (M2)
REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-809)(PC4E)
5
5
6
1-475-950-21 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-811)(PC5)
1-475-950-31 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-812)(PC5E)
3-053-056-01 LID,BATTERY CASE (FOR RMT-811, 812)
(PC5/PC5E)
Ref. No.
6-1
8
Part No.
Description
Remarks
6
7
8
8
8
3-742-854-21
3-052-290-11
3-062-110-02
3-062-110-11
3-062-110-21
LID,BATTERY CASE (FOR RMT-809)(PC4E)
COVER, BATTERY TERMINAL
COVER, JACK (PC5)
COVER, JACK (PC5E:AEP,UK)
COVER, JACK (PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
8
9
10
3-062-110-31 COVER, JACK (PC4E)
3-989-735-31 SCREW(M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2
X-3950-754-1 CAP ASSY, LENS
6-1-2. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1
62
51
Cabinet (R) block assembly-2
(See page 6-3)
61
A
B
LCD901
ND901
B
51
PD
Bo -126
ard
63
52
60
57
54
59
51
55
56
51
58
57
A
53
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remarks
51
52
52
52
* 53
3-989-735-11
X-3950-766-1
X-3950-769-1
X-3950-771-1
3-062-196-01
SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2
CABINET (R) ASSY, LCD (GRAY)(PC4E)
CABINET (R) ASSY, LCD (GRAY)(PC5/PC5E)
CABINET (R) ASSY, LCD (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E)
SHEET, BL INSULATING
0 54
55
56
* 57
58
1-418-878-11
3-062-195-01
A-7074-456-A
3-051-232-01
3-060-704-01
TRANSFORMER UNIT, INVERTER
SPACER, PD
PD-126 BOARD, COMPLETE
CLIP, PCB
SHEET (N), BL SHIELD
Ref. No.
59
60
61
62
62
Part No.
Description
Remarks
3-055-802-01
3-055-839-01
1-418-928-11
X-3950-748-1
SPACER, PANEL
SHEET, PANEL PROTECTION
PANEL, TOUCH (TP-30350)
CABINET (T) ASSY, LCD (GRAY)
(PC4E/PC5/PC5E)
X-3950-757-1 CABINET (T) ASSY, LCD (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E)
* 63
3-063-889-01 SHEET, (S)
LCD901 8-753-050-52 ACX300CK-J
0 ND901 1-517-931-11 TUBE, FLUORESCENT,COLD CATHODE
6-2
Note :
The components identified by
mark 0 or dotted line with mark
0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number
specified.
Note :
Les composants identifiés par
une marque 0 sont critiques
pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une
pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
6-1-3. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2
114
104
Harness
(Two cores)
(PR-062) (8P) (2P)
(8P)
131
130
not
supplied
113
(2P)
104
119
129
120
121
115
122
128
118
107
123
104
109
124
104
108
(14P)
104
116
104
Harness
(PD-109) (14P)
(8P)
112
111
110
(14P)
106
106
125
126
103 132
104
104
117
105
127
102
101
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
101
102
103
104
105
3-062-193-01
3-062-192-01
3-062-191-01
3-989-735-11
X-3950-744-1
SLIDER, EJECT KNOB
KNOB, EJECT
SCREW, TRIPOD
SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2
FRAME ASSY, BOTTOM
106
107
108
109
110
A-7074-459-A
3-062-211-01
1-694-689-11
3-713-791-01
3-062-207-01
BJ-1 BOARD, COMPLETE
SHEET, FLEXIBLE PROTECTION
TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY
SCREW (M1.7X4), TAPPING, P2
HOLDER, BATTERY
111
112
* 113
114
114
3-062-208-01
A-7074-457-A
3-055-323-01
X-3950-747-1
X-3950-756-1
SHEET, BATTERY HOLDER
PO-5 BOARD, COMPLETE
SPRING (MK), TORSION
PLATE ASSY, BLIND (GRAY)(PC4E/PC5/PC5E)
PLATE ASSY, BLIND (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E)
115
116
116
117
118
119
120
120
121
Remarks
A-7074-458-A PR-34 BOARD, COMPLETE
3-062-105-01 COVER (FRONT), HINGE (GRAY)
(PC4E/PC5/PC5E)
3-062-105-11 COVER (FRONT), HINGE (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E)
3-989-735-31 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2
3-062-202-01 PLATE, DV FIXED
X-3950-746-1 HINGE ASSY, LCD
3-062-106-01 COVER (REAR), HINGE (GRAY)
(PC4E/PC5/PC5E)
3-062-106-11 COVER (REAR), HINGE (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E)
3-062-217-01 CABINET (R) (M) (GRAY) (PC4E/PC5/PC5E)
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
121
122
123
123
124
3-062-217-11
3-062-194-01
3-062-109-01
3-062-109-11
3-062-111-11
CABINET (R) (M) (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E)
SPACER, LOCK
LID, CPC (GRAY)(PC4E/PC5/PC5E)
LID, CPC (BLUE) (PC5/PC5E)
LABEL, POWER (GRAY)
(PC5/PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
124
124
124
125
125
3-062-111-21 LABEL, POWER (GRAY)(PC4E/PC5E:AEP,UK)
3-062-111-41 LABEL, POWER (BLUE)
(PC5/PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
3-062-111-51 LABEL, POWER (BLUE)(PC5E:AEP,UK)
3-062-108-11 SHEET, GUARD (GRAY)(PC4E/PC5/PC5E)
3-062-108-31 SHEET, GUARD (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E)
126
127
127
127
127
3-062-188-01
3-062-112-11
3-062-112-21
3-062-112-31
3-062-112-51
COVER, ORNAMENT
LABEL, JACK (GRAY)(PC5)
LABEL, JACK (GRAY)(PC5E:AEP,UK)
LABEL, JACK (GRAY)(PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
LABEL, JACK (BLUE)(PC5)
127
127
127
* 128
* 129
3-062-112-61
3-062-112-71
3-062-112-81
3-062-786-01
3-062-788-01
LABEL, JACK (BLUE)(PC5E:AEP,UK)
LABEL, JACK (BLUE)(PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
LABEL, JACK (GRAY)(PC4E)
SPACER, MF
TAPE (2030)
130
131
* 132
1-960-422-11 HARNESS (PR-062) (8P) (2P)
1-960-421-11 HARNESS (PD-109) (14P)
3-062-924-01 CUSHION, BT
6-3
Remarks
6-1-4. LENS-EVF SECTION
170
171
D
C
158
A
IC3201
170
174
B
172
166
159
168
151
159
167
170
159
169
173
not
supplied
152
158
158
156
154
not
supplied
157
153
155
M905
165
153
173
173
M904
157
A
B
164
162
161
163
C
D
160
not
supplied
158
LCD902
170
LED902
Be sure to read “Precautions upon replacing CCD imager”
on page 4-14 when changing the CCD imager.
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
151
152
153
154
155
X-3950-751-1
X-3950-752-1
3-056-030-21
3-062-190-01
3-062-203-01
LENS ASSY, VF
RING ASSY, VF REGULATION
LOCK ACE (M1.7), 0 PLATE 2 MAIN
SLEEVE, VF
PLATE, VF ACRYLIC
156
157
158
159
* 160
X-3950-750-1
3-713-791-51
3-989-735-11
3-713-791-01
3-062-767-01
161
162
163
164
165
3-062-206-01
3-062-204-01
3-062-205-01
8-848-738-01
A-7031-114-A
* 166
Remarks
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remarks
167
168
169
170
171
1-758-155-21
3-053-973-01
3-062-212-01
A-7074-455-A
3-713-791-41
FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL (OFB-04-14)
RUBBER (W), SEAL
SHEET, CF INSULATING
CF-75 BOARD, COMPLETE
SCREW (M1.7X5), TAPPING, P2
GUIDE ASSY, VF SLEEVE
SCREW (M1.7X3.5), TAPPING, P2
SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2
SCREW (M1.7X4), TAPPING, P2
CUSHION, LCD
* 172
173
* 174
IC3201
IC3201
3-062-201-01
3-713-791-91
3-062-889-01
A-7031-011-A
A-7031-012-A
FRAME, CD
SCREW (M1.7X4), TAPPING, P2
SHEET, LF PROTECTION
CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC5)
CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC4E/PC5E)
CUSHION (L), BL
BLUNIT
CUSHION (B), BL
DEVICE, LENS (LSV-651B)
RING BLOCK ASSY, MF (SERVICE)
LCD902
LCD902
0 LED902
M904
M905
8-753-026-74
8-753-026-77
1-418-738-11
1-763-168-12
1-763-169-12
LCX032AK-J (PC4E)
LCX033AK-J (PC5/PC5E)
BLOCK, LIGHT GUIDE PLATE (0.44)
ZOOM MOTOR
FOCUS MOTOR
3-062-200-01 FRAME, LN
6-4
Note :
The components identified by
mark 0 or dotted line with mark
0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number
specified.
Note :
Les composants identifiés par
une marque 0 sont critiques
pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une
pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
6-1-5. CABINET (L) SECTION
EG
not
supplied
205
SP901
212
MIC901
not
supplied
231
213
202
G F
215
202
229
230
211 210
224
F
E
not
supplied
226
214
not
supplied
223 218
202
205
J4002
J4001
209
219
202 202
202
205
202
220
217
G
G
D
C
C
B
208
A
205
(PC5/PC5E)
202
225
220
C not
supplied
BT4001
5
4
-2
VCard
o
B
221
207
222
CN4001
227
216
203
206
202
202
B
A
C
201
202
Mechanism deck
(See page 6-6 to 6-8)
204
228
: BT4001 (Lithium battery) Control switch block on the mount position. (See page 4-63)
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remarks
201
202
203
204
205
3-059-722-01
3-989-735-11
X-3950-753-1
A-7074-460-A
3-713-791-01
COVER, CASSETTE COMPARTMENT
SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2
WINDOW ASSY, NS
NS-12 BOARD, COMPLETE
SCREW (M1.7X4), TAPPING, P2
206
207
208
209
210
3-062-198-01
X-3950-743-1
X-3950-742-1
3-062-189-02
3-062-132-01
RETAINER, MS CONNECTOR
FRAME ASSY, MD
BRACKET (FRONT) ASSY, BELT
SCREW (M2.6), SPECIAL HEAD(STEP)
COVER (HP&S), JACK
211
212
212
212
213
3-062-141-01
X-3950-764-1
X-3950-767-1
X-3950-770-1
X-3950-745-1
BELT, GRIP
CABINET (L) ASSY(PC4E)
CABINET (L) ASSY (GRAY)(PC5/PC5E)
CABINET (L) ASSY (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E)
RETAINER ASSY, SPEAKER
214
215
215
215
215
3-062-199-01
X-3950-765-1
X-3950-768-1
X-3950-772-1
X-3950-773-1
RETAINER, HP JACK
CABINET (G) ASSY (BLUE)(PC4E)
CABINET (G) ASSY (PC5)
CABINET (G) ASSY (PC5E:AEP,UK)
CABINET (G) ASSY (PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
216
1-418-927-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-30350)
(PC5/PC5E)
1-418-927-21 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-30350)(PC4E)
3-975-921-01 SHEET, VIBRATION PROOF
3-062-209-01 SHEET, FIXED
1-418-925-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PS-30350)
(PC5/PC5E)
Ref. No.
219
220
221
222
222
216
217
218
219
222
D
Part No.
Description
Remarks
1-418-925-21
3-062-214-01
3-062-210-01
A-7096-203-A
SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PS-30350)(PC4E)
SCREW (M1.4X1.5)
CUSHION, VC
VC-245 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
(PC5/PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
A-7096-277-A VC-245 (P) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
(PC5E:AEP,UK)
223
* 224
* 225
* 226
A-7096-278-A VC-245 (L) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
(PC4E)
1-469-833-11 BEAD, FERRITE
3-062-827-01 SHEET, BJ INSULATING
3-062-826-01 SHEET, DV INSULATING
3-063-395-01 PLATE, G FRAME GROUND
* 227
228
229
230
231
3-062-828-01
3-059-725-01
3-062-128-01
3-062-127-01
3-056-030-11
6-5
SHEET, TERMINAL BOARD
LABEL, LS
SPRING, COMPRESSION
LOCK, BATTERY
LOCK ACE (M1.7), 0 PLATE 2 MAIN
BT4001 1-756-075-11 BATTERY, LITHIUM (SECONDARY)
CN4001 1-794-262-11 CONNECTOR, MEMORY STICK (11P)
(PC5/PC5E)
J4001 1-694-688-11 TERMINAL, S (S VIDEO)
J4002 1-784-943-41 JACK (SMALL TYPE)(HEADPHONE)
MIC901 1-418-926-11 MICROPHONE BLOCK
SP901
1-529-674-11 SPEAKER (16MM)
6-1-6. CASSETTE COMPARTMENT AND DRUM BLOCK ASSEMBLY
703
702
704
M901
709
705
701
701
706
LS chassis block
assembly
(See page 6-7)
Mechanism chassis block
assembly
(See page 6-8)
710
707
708
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
701
702
703
704
705
3-703-816-14
X-3950-369-2
3-059-082-01
3-059-208-01
X-3950-370-3
SCREW (M1.4)
CASSETTE COMPARTMENT ASSY
SPRING, TENSION
SPRING (CASSETTE COMPARTMENT T)
DAMPER ASSY
Remarks
706
3-059-101-03 RETAINER, LS GUIDE
701
Ref. No.
707
708
709
710
M901
6-6
Part No.
Description
7-624-102-04
A-7028-133-B
3-703-816-41
3-063-036-01
A-7048-940-A
STOP RING 1.5, TYPE -E
MD (J100) SUB ASSY (K)
SCREW (M1.4X2.5), SPECIAL HEAD
SPACER, WASHER (PS)
DRUM (DEH-18A-R)
Remarks
6-1-7. LS CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY
762
761
752
763
764
765
766
760
758
752
759
not supplied
757
not supplied
768
not supplied
Q901
756
D901
H901
H902
S903
Q902
772
FP-102
(Note)
755
770
769
773
754
771
774
753
not supplied
752
775
751
Note: FP-102 is included in the LS sub assy and is attached
to chassis by hot-press.
Because installation of FP-102 requires a very high
accuracy, FP-102 is not supplied as an independent
service parts.
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Part No.
Description
751
752
753
754
755
3-059-173-01
3-059-100-01
X-3950-364-1
X-3950-371-1
3-059-166-01
PLATE, LS CAM
SCREW (M1.4X1.4), SPECIAL HEAD
GEAR ASSY, GOOSENECK
ARM ASSY, BRAKE (S) DRIVING
BRAKE (S)
Remarks
Ref. No.
766
768
769
770
771
3-059-093-01
A-7094-819-A
3-059-165-01
X-3950-359-1
3-059-161-01
RETAINER, LED
TG7 BLOCK ASSY
SPRING (TG7 RETURN), TORSION
ARM ASSY, PINCH
SPRING (PINCH RETURN), TORSION
756
757
758
759
760
3-059-146-01
3-059-167-01
3-059-169-01
3-703-816-14
3-059-090-01
POSITIONING (S), CASSETTE
SPRING (BRAKE S), TENSION COIL
SPRING (BRAKE S ARM), TORSION
SCREW (M1.4)
SCREW (M1.4X2.5), SPECIAL HEAD
772
773
774
775
D901
3-059-170-01
3-059-171-01
3-059-172-01
A-7094-816-A
8-719-078-71
BRAKE (T)
GEAR (T), BRAKE
SPRING (T), BRAKE
LS BLOCK ASSY
DIODE LA57A, SO (TAPE LED)
761
762
763
764
765
X-3950-358-3
3-059-156-01
X-3950-365-2
X-3950-366-1
X-3950-361-1
TG1 ASSY
SPRING (TENSION REGULATOR)
TABLE ASSY, S REEL
TABLE ASSY, T REEL
PLATE ASSY, RETAINER
H901
H902
Q901
Q902
S903
8-719-067-74
8-719-067-74
8-729-028-71
8-729-028-71
1-771-326-41
ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T (S REEL)
ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T (T REEL)
TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE END)
TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE TOP)
SWITCH, PUSH LEVER (1KEY) (CC DOWN)
6-7
Remarks
6-1-8. MECHANISM CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY
815
807
811
822
812
813
824
820
821
823
814
815
816
815
810
M903
not
supplied
815
M902 (Including belt)
825
819
815
809
808
818
806
817
807
815
829
804
826
827
805
801
828
803
802
not supplied
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
801
802
803
804
805
3-059-211-01
3-059-220-01
3-059-187-01
3-059-186-03
3-060-002-01
GEAR, CONVERSION
GEAR, RELAY
SHAFT, WORM
HOLDER, MOTOR
ROLLER, LS GUIDE
806
807
808
809
810
3-059-189-01
3-703-816-41
3-059-225-01
3-059-191-01
3-059-190-01
811
812
813
814
815
1-677-049-11
1-677-084-11
3-059-149-01
3-059-148-01
3-703-816-14
816
3-059-117-01 COVER (A), GEAR
Remarks
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
817
818
819
820
821
X-3950-367-1
3-059-139-01
3-059-188-01
A-7094-818-A
A-7094-817-A
GEAR ASSY, MODE
GEAR, GL DRIVING
GEAR, DECELERATION
COASTER (S) BLOCK ASSY
COASTER (T) BLOCK ASSY
GEAR (A), CAM
SCREW (M1.4X2.5), SPECIAL HEAD
SHIELD, MOTOR
ROLLER, LS
ARM, LS
822
823
824
825
826
3-059-126-01
3-962-914-01
A-7094-822-A
3-059-118-01
3-059-083-01
RAIL, GUIDE
SCREW (M1.4X2)
DRUM BASE BLOCK ASSY
COVER (B), GEAR
COVER (C), GEAR
FP-228 FLEXIBLE BOARD
FP-100 FLEXIBLE BOARD
SLIDER, TG1 CAM
ARM, TG1 DRIVING
SCREW (M1.4)
827
828
829
M902
X-3950-368-1
3-059-192-01
3-063-355-01
8-835-685-01
M903
6-8
Remarks
ARM ASSY, PINCH DRIVING
GEAR (B), CAM
ROLLER (S1), LS GUIDE
MOTOR, DC SCD18A/C-NP (INCLUDING BELT)
CAPSTAN
A-7094-823-A MOTOR BLOCK ASSY, LOADING
BJ-1
CF-75
6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
NOTE:
• Due to standardization, replacements in the
parts list may be different from the parts
specified in the diagrams or the components
used on the set.
• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may
have some difference from the original one.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they
are seldom required for routine service. Some
delay should be anticipated when ordering these
items.
• CAPACITORS:
uF: µF
•
•
•
•
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
RESISTORS
All resistors are in ohms.
METAL: metal-film resistor
METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor
F: nonflammable
COILS
uH: µH
SEMICONDUCTORS
In each case, u: µ, for example:
uA...: µA... , uPA... , µPA... ,
uPB... , µPB... , uPC... , µPC... ,
uPD..., µPD...
Abbreviation
AUS: Australian model
JE:
Tourist model
Remarks Ref. No.
Part No.
A-7074-459-A BJ-1 BOARD, COMPLETE
********************
VDR311
VDR312
VDR313
VDR315
VDR316
< CAPACITOR >
1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP
The components identified by mark 0 or
dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
Les composants identifiés par une marque
0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant
le numéro spécifié.
CND:
CN:
HK:
KR:
Description
Canadian model
Chinese model
Hong Kong model
Korea model
Remarks
< VARISTOR >
(Ref.No.;30000 Series)
C3101
C3103
When indicating parts by reference number,
please include the board name.
0.001uF
0.001uF
10%
10%
16V
16V
1-803-742-21
1-803-742-21
1-803-742-21
1-803-742-21
1-803-742-21
VARISTOR, CHIP
VARISTOR, CHIP
VARISTOR, CHIP
VARISTOR, CHIP
VARISTOR, CHIP
VDR319 1-803-742-21 VARISTOR, CHIP
************************************************************
< CONNECTOR >
A-7074-455-A CF-75 BOARD, COMPLETE
*********************
(Ref.No.;20000 Series)
(IC3201 is not included in this complete board.)
CN3102 1-794-276-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE 4P
CN3103 1-794-403-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 60P
CN3104 1-794-375-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 2P
< DIODE >
< CAPACITOR >
D3101
D3102
D3103
8-719-072-91 DIODE MAZJ200D0LS0
8-719-056-61 DIODE 015AZ8.2-TPL3
8-719-056-61 DIODE 015AZ8.2-TPL3
< FERRITE BEAD >
FB3101
FB3102
FB3103
FB3104
FB3105
1-500-444-11
1-500-444-11
1-500-444-11
1-500-444-11
1-500-444-11
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
0UH
0UH
0UH
0UH
0UH
FB3106 1-500-444-11 FERRITE
0UH
< JACK >
J3101
J3102
J3103
1-691-737-11 JACK (SMALL TYPE)(EXT MIC)
1-793-995-11 JACK, SUPER SMALL TYPE (l LANC)
1-778-040-11 JACK, SMALL TYPE (AV JACK)
< IC LINK >
0 PS3101
0 PS3102
0 PS3103
0 PS3104
1-576-415-21
1-576-415-21
1-576-415-21
1-576-415-21
FUSE, MICRO (2A)(1608)
FUSE, MICRO (2A)(1608)
FUSE, MICRO (2A)(1608)
FUSE, MICRO (2A)(1608)
< RESISTOR >
R3101
R3102
R3103
R3105
R3110
1-216-864-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-864-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
0
0
0
0
0
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R3111
R3112
1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP
0
0
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
C2201
C2202
C2203
C3201
C3202
1-117-919-11
1-125-777-11
1-119-923-81
1-104-851-11
1-164-850-11
TANTAL. CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
TANTAL. CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
10uF
0.1uF
0.047uF
10uF
10PF
20%
10%
10%
20%
0.50PF
6.3V
10V
10V
10V
16V
C3203
C3204
C3207
C3208
C3452
1-107-820-11
1-119-751-11
1-164-939-11
1-164-004-11
1-127-895-91
CERAMIC CHIP
TANTAL. CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
TANTAL. CHIP
0.1uF
22uF
0.0022uF
0.1uF
22uF
20%
10%
10%
20%
16V
16V
16V
25V
4V
C3453
C3454
C3455
C3456
C3457
1-127-895-91
1-125-777-11
1-125-777-11
1-119-923-81
1-119-923-81
TANTAL. CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
22uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
0.047uF
0.047uF
20%
10%
10%
10%
10%
4V
10V
10V
10V
10V
C3458
C3459
C3460
C3461
C3462
1-119-923-81
1-119-923-81
1-125-817-11
1-125-817-11
1-125-817-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.047uF
0.047uF
10uF
10uF
10uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10V
10V
6.3V
6.3V
6.3V
C3463
C3464
C3465
C3466
1-125-817-11
1-110-501-11
1-127-895-91
1-125-777-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
TANTAL. CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
10uF
0.33uF
22uF
0.1uF
10%
10%
20%
10%
6.3V
16V
4V
10V
< CONNECTOR >
CN2201
CN2202
CN3351
CN3353
CN3354
6-9
1-750-346-21
1-750-340-21
1-784-421-11
1-794-411-21
1-794-404-21
CONNECTOR, FFC/EPC (ZIF) 6P
CONNECTOR, FFC/EPC (ZIF) 16P
CONNECTOR, FPC (ZIF) 27P
CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (LIF) 8P
CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 88P
CF-75
Ref. No.
FP-102
Part No.
NS-12
PD-126
Description
Remarks
Ref. No.
Part No.
IC3201
IC3201
IC3451
A-7031-011-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC5)
A-7031-012-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC4E/PC5E)
8-759-489-19 IC uPC6756GR-8JG-E2
FP-102 FLEXIBLE (Not supplied)
**************************
(Ref.No.;4000 Series)
1-414-757-11 INDUCTOR
100uH
1-414-771-91 INDUCTOR CHIP 10uH
< DIODE >
D901
< TRANSISTOR >
Q2202
Q2203
Q2204
Q2205
Q2206
8-729-041-23
8-729-037-52
8-729-037-52
8-729-037-52
8-729-037-52
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
Q2207
Q3201
Q3202
8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR
8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR
8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR
Remarks
TH2201 1-810-812-21 THERMISTOR, NTC (1608)
************************************************************
< COIL >
L3201
L3451
Description
< THERMISTOR >
< IC >
8-719-078-71 DIODE LN57A.SO
< HOLE ELEMENT >
NDS356AP
2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
H901
H902
8-719-067-74 ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T
8-719-067-74 ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T
< TRANSISTOR >
UN9213J-(K8).SO
2SC4178-F13F14-T1
UN9213J-(K8).SO
Q901
Q902
8-729-028-71 TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE END)
8-729-028-71 TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE TOP)
< SWITCH >
< RESISTOR >
S903
1-771-326-41 SWITCH, PUSH LEVER (1KEY) (CC DOWN)
************************************************************
R2201
R2203
R2204
R2205
R2206
1-218-985-11
1-218-964-11
1-218-990-11
1-218-964-11
1-218-971-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
SHORT
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
470K
8.2K
0
8.2K
33K
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
R2207
R2208
R2209
R2211
R2212
1-218-964-11
1-218-955-11
1-218-962-11
1-218-957-11
1-218-937-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
8.2K
1.5K
5.6K
2.2K
47
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R2213
R2214
R2215
R2216
R2217
1-218-937-11
1-218-971-11
1-218-977-11
1-218-977-11
1-218-977-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
47
33K
100K
100K
100K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R2218
R3201
R3202
R3351
R3451
1-218-977-11
1-218-959-11
1-218-990-11
1-218-959-11
1-218-969-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
SHORT
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
100K
3.3K
0
3.3K
22K
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
R3452
R3453
R3454
R3455
R3456
1-218-969-11
1-218-969-11
1-218-969-11
1-218-965-11
1-218-965-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
22K
22K
22K
10K
10K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
C2101
C2102
C2103
C2104
C2105
1-119-750-11
1-125-777-11
1-164-943-11
1-117-919-11
1-125-777-11
TANTAL. CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
TANTAL. CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
22uF
0.1uF
0.01uF
10uF
0.1uF
20%
10%
10%
20%
10%
6.3V
10V
16V
6.3V
10V
R3457
R3458
R3459
1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP
1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP
1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP
1M
15K
1M
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
C2107
C2108
C2109
C2110
C2111
1-107-826-91
1-164-943-11
1-164-943-11
1-164-943-11
1-164-739-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.1uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
560PF
10%
10%
10%
10%
5%
16V
16V
16V
16V
50V
C2112
C2113
C2114
C2115
C2116
1-125-838-91
1-164-004-11
1-164-943-11
1-107-687-11
1-164-937-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
TANTAL. CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
2.2uF
0.1uF
0.01uF
3.3uF
0.001uF
10%
10%
10%
20%
10%
6.3V
25V
16V
20V
16V
A-7074-460-A NS-12 BOARD, COMPLETE
*********************
(Ref No.;20000 Series)
< DIODE >
D003
D005
D006
< IC >
IC001
8-749-013-13 IC RS-70-TU
************************************************************
A-7074-456-A PD-126 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
(Ref.No.;40000 Series)
< CAPACITOR >
< SWITCH >
S2201
8-719-061-82 DIODE TLSU1002(TPX1,SONY)
8-719-078-78 DIODE DCZ2805
8-719-078-78 DIODE DCZ2805
1-762-805-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY)(EVF ON/OFF)
< SENSOR >
SE3450 1-418-682-41 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (YAW)
SE3451 1-418-682-21 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (PITCH)
Be sure to read “Precautions upon replacing CCD imager”
on page 4-14 when changing the CCD imager.
6-10
PD-126
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
C2117
C2118
C2119
C2120
C2123
1-164-874-11
1-125-838-91
1-125-838-91
1-125-838-91
1-107-687-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
TANTAL. CHIP
100PF
2.2uF
2.2uF
2.2uF
3.3uF
5%
10%
10%
10%
20%
Remarks
16V
6.3V
6.3V
6.3V
20V
C2124
C2125
C2126
C2127
C2128
1-164-943-11
1-163-021-91
1-115-566-11
1-125-777-11
1-107-725-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
4.7uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
16V
50V
10V
10V
16V
C2129
C2130
C2133
C2181
C2182
1-216-295-91
1-164-943-11
1-109-982-11
1-128-964-91
1-125-777-11
SHORT
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
TANTAL. CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0 (Note)
0.01uF
1uF
100uF
0.1uF
10%
10%
20%
10%
16V
10V
6.3V
10V
C2183
C2184
C2185
C2186
1-128-964-91
1-125-777-11
1-104-851-11
1-125-777-11
TANTAL. CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
TANTAL. CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
100uF
0.1uF
10uF
0.1uF
20%
10%
20%
10%
6.3V
10V
10V
10V
Ref. No.
1-794-378-21
1-794-377-21
1-778-155-11
1-778-172-11
1-764-704-21
Description
Remarks
< RESISTOR >
< CONNECTOR >
CN2100
CN2101
* CN2103
* CN2104
CN2105
Part No.
PO-5
PIN, CONNECTOR 14P
PIN, CONNECTOR 8P
CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 7P
CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 24P
CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (LIF) 5P
R2111
R2112
R2113
R2114
R2115
1-218-985-11
1-218-985-11
1-218-990-11
1-218-967-11
1-218-958-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
SHORT
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
470K
470K
0
15K
2.7K
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
R2116
R2117
R2118
R2119
R2122
1-218-973-11
1-218-975-11
1-218-969-11
1-218-975-11
1-218-989-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
47K
68K
22K
68K
1M
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R2123
R2124
R2129
R2134
R2136
1-218-990-11
1-218-977-11
1-218-990-11
1-218-929-11
1-218-929-11
SHORT
RES-CHIP
SHORT
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
0
100K
0
10
10
5%
1/16W
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
R2137
R2138
R2143
R2144
R2146
1-218-929-11
1-218-941-11
1-218-965-11
1-218-985-11
1-218-990-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
SHORT
10
100
10K
470K
0
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R2147
R2148
R2153
R2157
R2158
1-218-990-11
1-218-965-11
1-218-990-11
1-218-989-11
1-218-975-11
SHORT
RES-CHIP
SHORT
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
0
10K
0
1M
68K
5%
1/16W
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
R2159
R2160
R2162
R2163
R2165
1-218-979-11
1-218-988-11
1-218-990-11
1-218-990-11
1-218-990-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
150K
820K
0
0
0
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
R2166
R2168
R2169
R2170
R2172
1-218-965-11
1-218-990-11
1-218-990-11
1-218-977-11
1-218-990-11
RES-CHIP
SHORT
SHORT
RES-CHIP
SHORT
10K
0
0
100K
0
5%
1/16W
5%
1/16W
R2173
R2174
R2175
R2176
R2177
1-218-990-11
1-218-990-11
1-218-990-11
1-218-990-11
1-218-977-11
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
RES-CHIP
0
0
0
0
100K
5%
1/16W
R2178
R2179
R2180
R2181
R2182
1-218-977-11
1-218-977-11
1-218-977-11
1-218-961-11
1-218-953-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
100K
100K
100K
4.7K
1K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
< DIODE >
D2101
D2102
D2104
D2104
D2181
8-719-073-01
8-713-102-80
8-719-040-12
8-719-050-42
8-719-059-47
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
MA111-TX
1T369-01-T8A
015Z3.3-TPH3
RD3.3UM-T1B
PG1111R-TR
< IC >
IC2101
IC2103
8-759-660-93 IC RB5P004AM1
8-752-403-84 IC CXD3505R-T4
< COIL >
L2101
L2102
L2103
L2104
L2181
1-414-755-11
1-414-754-11
1-414-754-11
1-410-998-31
1-412-056-11
INDUCTOR
INDUCTOR
INDUCTOR
INDUCTOR
INDUCTOR
22uH
10uH
10uH
2.7uH
4.7uH
L2182
1-414-757-11 INDUCTOR
100uH
< TRANSISTOR >
Q2101
Q2102
Q2103
Q2104
Q2109
8-729-427-74
8-729-037-74
8-729-427-74
8-729-041-23
8-729-037-53
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
XP4601-TXE
UN9213J-(TX).SO
XP4601-TXE
NDS356AP
2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO
Q2111
Q2112
Q2181
Q2182
Q2183
8-729-037-52
8-729-048-77
8-729-042-72
8-729-037-53
8-729-042-59
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
XP4313-(TX).SO
UN9214J-(K8).SO
2SA1832F-Y/GR(TPL3)
UN9112J-(K8).SO
R2183 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP
100
5%
1/16W
R2184 1-218-990-11 SHORT
0
************************************************************
A-7074-457-A PO-5 BOARD, COMPLETE
********************
(Ref.No.;30000 Series)
< SWITCH >
S3501 1-762-805-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY)(PANEL OPEN)
************************************************************
Note : Short is mounted to the location where C2129 is printed.
6-11
PR-34
Ref. No.
VC-245
Part No.
Description
Remarks
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remarks
A-7096-203-A VC-245 BOARD, COMPLETE
(PC5/PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
**********************
A-7096-277-A VC-245 BOARD, COMPLETE (PC5E:AEP,UK)
**********************
A-7096-278-A VC-245 (L) BOARD, COMPLETE (PC4E)
*************************
(Ref.No.;10000 Series)
A-7074-458-A PR-34 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
(Ref.No;30000 Series)
< SWITCH >
S3601 1-771-338-21 SWITCH, PUSH (PANEL REVERSE)
************************************************************
************************************************************
Electrical parts list of the VC-245 board
are not shown.
pages 6-13 to 6-25 are not shown.
6-12
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remarks
Ref. No.
MISCELLANEOUS
*************
0 54
61
108
130
131
164
167
216
216
219
219
223
811
812
BT4001
1-418-878-11
1-418-928-11
1-694-689-11
1-960-422-11
1-960-421-11
TRANSFORMER UNIT, INVERTER
PANEL, TOUCH (TP-30350)
TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY
HARNESS (PR-062) (8P) (2P)
HARNESS (PD-109) (14P)
0
0
8-848-738-01 DEVICE, LENS (LSV-651B)
1-758-155-21 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL (OFB-04-14)
1-418-927-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-30350)
(PC5/PC5E)
1-418-927-21 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-30350)(PC4E)
1-418-925-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PS-30350)
(PC5/PC5E)
1-418-925-21
1-469-833-11
1-677-049-11
1-677-084-11
1-756-075-11
* 0
0
0
0
0
SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PS-30350)(PC4E)
BEAD, FERRITE
FP-228 FLEXIBLE BOARD
FP-100 FLEXIBLE BOARD
BATTERY, LITHIUM (SECONDARY)
0
CN4001 1-794-262-11 CONNECTOR, MEMORY STICK (11P)
(PC5/PC5E)
D901
8-719-078-71 DIODE LA57A, SO (TAPE LED)
H901
8-719-067-74 ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T (S REEL)
H902
8-719-067-74 ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T (T REEL)
IC3201 A-7031-011-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC5)
IC3201
J4001
J4002
LCD901
LCD902
A-7031-012-A
1-694-688-11
1-784-943-41
8-753-050-52
8-753-026-74
LCD902
0 LED902
M901
M902
8-753-026-77
1-418-738-11
A-7048-940-A
8-835-685-01
M903
M904
M905
MIC901
0 ND901
Q901
CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC4E/PC5E)
TERMINAL, S (S VIDEO)
JACK (SMALL TYPE)(HEADPHONE)
ACX300CK-J
LCX032AK-J (PC4E)
LCX033AK-J (PC5/PC5E)
BLOCK, LIGHT GUIDE PLATE (0.44)
DRUM (DEH-18A-R)
MOTOR, DC SCD18A/C-NP (INCLUDING BELT)
CAPSTAN
A-7094-823-A MOTOR BLOCK ASSY, LOADING
1-763-168-12
1-763-169-12
1-418-926-11
1-517-931-11
8-729-028-71
ZOOM MOTOR
FOCUS MOTOR
MICROPHONE BLOCK
TUBE, FLUORESCENT,COLD CATHODE
TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE END)
Q902
8-729-028-71 TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE TOP)
S903
1-771-326-41 SWITCH, PUSH LEVER (1KEY) (CC DOWN)
SP901 1-529-674-11 SPEAKER (16MM)
************************************************************
ACCESSORIES
************
0
0
0
0
0
1-475-141-31 COMMANDER, REMOTE (RMT-809)(PC4E)
1-475-851-22 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-VF10)(PC5:US,CND)
1-475-851-33 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-VF10)
(PC4E/PC5:E,HK,JE/PC5E:AEP,UK,E,HK,AUS,JE)
1-475-851-71 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-VF10)(PC5:KR)
1-475-851-81 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-VF10)(PC5E:CN)
Be sure to read “Precautions upon replacing CCD imager”
on page 4-14 when changing the CCD imager.
6-26
0
Part No.
Description
Remarks
1-475-950-21 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-811)
(PC5/PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
1-475-950-31 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-812)
(PC5E:AEP,UK)
1-543-798-11 FILTER, CLAMP (FERRITE CORE)
(PC4E/PC5E:AEP,UK)
1-569-007-11 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P (PC5:JE/PC5E:JE)
1-569-008-21 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P
(PC5:E,HK/PC5E:E,HK)
1-573-291-11 CONNECTOR, CONVERSION (21P)
(PC4E/PC5E:AEP,UK)
1-575-131-11 CORD, POWER (PC5:E/PC5E:E)
1-696-819-11 CORD, POWER (PC5E:AUS)
1-765-080-11 CORD, CONNECTION (A/V)(1.5M)
1-769-608-11 CORD, POWER (PC4E:AEP/PC5E:AEP)
1-776-985-11
1-782-476-11
1-783-374-11
1-783-739-22
1-790-073-11
CORD, POWER (PC5:KR)
CORD, POWER (PC5E:CN)
CORD, POWER (PC4E:UK/PC5:HK/PC5E:UK,HK)
CORD CONNECTION (DK-115)(PC5/PC5E)
CORD, POWER 2P (PC5:JE/PC5E:JE)
1-790-107-22 CORD, POWER (PC5:US,CND)
1-792-451-11 CORD WITH CONNECTOR (PC SERIAL CABLE)
(PC5/PC5E)
3-053-056-01 LID, BATTERY CASE (FOR RMT-811,812)
(PC5/PC5E)
3-060-457-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(ENGLISH)(PC5:US,CND,E,HK,JE)
3-060-457-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(FRENCH)(PC5:CND)
3-060-457-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(TRADITIONAL CHINESE)
(PC5:E,HK/PC5E:HK)
3-060-457-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(KOREAN)(PC5:KR,JE)
3-060-458-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(ENGLISH,RUSSIAN)(PC5E)
3-060-458-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(FRENCH,GERMAN)
(PC5E:AEP,E,JE)
3-060-458-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(ITALIAN,DUTCH)(PC5E:AEP)
3-060-458-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(SPANISH,PORTUGUESE)
(PC5:E.JE/PC5E:E)
3-060-458-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(ARABIC,PERSIAN)
(PC5:E/PC5E:E)
3-060-458-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(SIMPLIFIED CHINESE)
(PC5E:E,CN,JE)
3-060-476-01 DISK, SYSTEM (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)
(PC5/PC5E)
3-062-114-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH)
(PC5:US,CND,E,HK,JE)
3-062-114-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH)(PC5:CND)
3-062-114-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(SPANISH,PORTUGUESE)(PC5:E,JE)
3-062-114-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(TRADITIONAL CHINESE)(PC5:E,HK)
3-062-114-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN)(PC5:KR,JE)
3-062-114-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC)(PC5:E)
Note :
The components identified by
mark 0 or dotted line with mark
0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number
specified.
Note :
Les composants identifiés par
une marque 0 sont critiques
pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une
pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remarks
3-062-115-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH,RUSSIAN)
(PC5E:AEP,UK)
3-062-115-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH,GERMAN)
(PC4E:AEP/PC5E:AEP)
3-062-115-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(SPANISH,PORTUGUESE)(PC4E:AEP/PC5E:AEP)
3-062-115-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN,DUTCH)
(PC4E:AEP/PC5E:AEP)
3-062-116-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH, RUSSIAN)
(PC5E:E,AUS,HK,CN,JE)
3-062-116-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH, GERMAN)
(PC5E:E,JE)
3-062-116-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ABABIC, PERSIAN)
(PC5E:E)
3-062-116-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(SIMPLIFIED CHINESE)(PC5E:E,CN,JE)
3-062-116-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(TRANDITIONAL CHINESE)(PC5E:HK)
3-742-854-21 LID, BATTERY CASE (FOR RMT-809)(PC4E)
3-967-386-11 CLEANING CLOTH
A-7033-740-A MEMORY STICK (MSA-4A)(PC5/PC5E)
6-27E
〈OPTICAL
AXIS FRAME〉
— 198 —
✂
Take a copy of OPTICAL AXIS
FRAME with a clear sheet for use.
〈FOR
CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT〉
For NTSC model
DCR-PC5
Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR
REPRODUCTION FRAME with
a clear sheet for use.
✂
For PAL model
✂
DCR-PC4E/PC5E
— 199 —

Similar documents

Paige Spring 2016 FNL REV.indd

Paige Spring 2016 FNL REV.indd for reading, hobbies, office, work and more. Each pair includes one set of batteries installed, plus an additional set of replacement batteries and a carrying case.

More information

service manual - SONYRUS :: OnLine Store

service manual - SONYRUS :: OnLine Store DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU ...

More information

GV-D200/D200E/D800/D800E

GV-D200/D200E/D800/D800E VC SO,VC SI,XVC SCX XCS KINUTA (IC2201) DA STRB (IC2291)

More information

cover - Philips Parts and Accessories

cover - Philips Parts and Accessories SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENT...

More information

STOXX Asia 1200

STOXX Asia 1200 7203.T 2330.TW 0700.HK 1299.HK 8306.T 0941.HK 9432.T 9433.T 0939.HK 9984.T 7267.T 8316.T RELI.BO 2914.T 8411.T 6758.T 9437.T 1398.HK 9022.T 2317.TW HDBK.BO 9020.T 4503.T INFY.BO 3382.T 4502.T 6954....

More information